Home | History | Annotate | Line # | Download | only in bfd
elf64-s390.c revision 1.1.1.9
      1      1.1     skrll /* IBM S/390-specific support for 64-bit ELF
      2  1.1.1.9  christos    Copyright (C) 2000-2022 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
      3      1.1     skrll    Contributed Martin Schwidefsky (schwidefsky (at) de.ibm.com).
      4      1.1     skrll 
      5      1.1     skrll    This file is part of BFD, the Binary File Descriptor library.
      6      1.1     skrll 
      7      1.1     skrll    This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
      8      1.1     skrll    it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
      9      1.1     skrll    the Free Software Foundation; either version 3 of the License, or
     10      1.1     skrll    (at your option) any later version.
     11      1.1     skrll 
     12      1.1     skrll    This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
     13      1.1     skrll    but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
     14      1.1     skrll    MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
     15      1.1     skrll    GNU General Public License for more details.
     16      1.1     skrll 
     17      1.1     skrll    You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
     18      1.1     skrll    along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
     19      1.1     skrll    Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street - Fifth Floor, Boston, MA
     20      1.1     skrll    02110-1301, USA.  */
     21      1.1     skrll 
     22      1.1     skrll #include "sysdep.h"
     23      1.1     skrll #include "bfd.h"
     24      1.1     skrll #include "bfdlink.h"
     25      1.1     skrll #include "libbfd.h"
     26      1.1     skrll #include "elf-bfd.h"
     27      1.1     skrll #include "elf/s390.h"
     28  1.1.1.6  christos #include "elf-s390.h"
     29  1.1.1.6  christos #include <stdarg.h>
     30      1.1     skrll 
     31      1.1     skrll /* In case we're on a 32-bit machine, construct a 64-bit "-1" value
     32      1.1     skrll    from smaller values.  Start with zero, widen, *then* decrement.  */
     33      1.1     skrll #define MINUS_ONE      (((bfd_vma)0) - 1)
     34      1.1     skrll 
     35  1.1.1.3  christos static bfd_reloc_status_type
     36  1.1.1.3  christos s390_tls_reloc (bfd *, arelent *, asymbol *, void *,
     37  1.1.1.3  christos 		asection *, bfd *, char **);
     38  1.1.1.3  christos static bfd_reloc_status_type
     39  1.1.1.3  christos s390_elf_ldisp_reloc (bfd *, arelent *, asymbol *, void *,
     40  1.1.1.3  christos 		      asection *, bfd *, char **);
     41  1.1.1.3  christos 
     42      1.1     skrll /* The relocation "howto" table.  */
     43      1.1     skrll static reloc_howto_type elf_howto_table[] =
     44      1.1     skrll {
     45      1.1     skrll   HOWTO (R_390_NONE,		/* type */
     46      1.1     skrll 	 0,			/* rightshift */
     47  1.1.1.9  christos 	 0,			/* size */
     48      1.1     skrll 	 0,			/* bitsize */
     49  1.1.1.9  christos 	 false,			/* pc_relative */
     50      1.1     skrll 	 0,			/* bitpos */
     51      1.1     skrll 	 complain_overflow_dont, /* complain_on_overflow */
     52      1.1     skrll 	 bfd_elf_generic_reloc, /* special_function */
     53      1.1     skrll 	 "R_390_NONE",		/* name */
     54  1.1.1.9  christos 	 false,			/* partial_inplace */
     55      1.1     skrll 	 0,			/* src_mask */
     56      1.1     skrll 	 0,			/* dst_mask */
     57  1.1.1.9  christos 	 false),		/* pcrel_offset */
     58      1.1     skrll 
     59  1.1.1.9  christos   HOWTO(R_390_8,	 0, 1,	8, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
     60  1.1.1.9  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_8",	 false, 0,0x000000ff, false),
     61  1.1.1.9  christos   HOWTO(R_390_12,	 0, 2, 12, false, 0, complain_overflow_dont,
     62  1.1.1.9  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_12",	 false, 0,0x00000fff, false),
     63  1.1.1.9  christos   HOWTO(R_390_16,	 0, 2, 16, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
     64  1.1.1.9  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_16",	 false, 0,0x0000ffff, false),
     65  1.1.1.9  christos   HOWTO(R_390_32,	 0, 4, 32, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
     66  1.1.1.9  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_32",	 false, 0,0xffffffff, false),
     67  1.1.1.9  christos   HOWTO(R_390_PC32,	 0, 4, 32,  true, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
     68  1.1.1.9  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_PC32",	 false, 0,0xffffffff, true),
     69  1.1.1.9  christos   HOWTO(R_390_GOT12,	 0, 2, 12, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
     70  1.1.1.9  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_GOT12",	 false, 0,0x00000fff, false),
     71  1.1.1.9  christos   HOWTO(R_390_GOT32,	 0, 4, 32, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
     72  1.1.1.9  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_GOT32",	 false, 0,0xffffffff, false),
     73  1.1.1.9  christos   HOWTO(R_390_PLT32,	 0, 4, 32,  true, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
     74  1.1.1.9  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_PLT32",	 false, 0,0xffffffff, true),
     75  1.1.1.9  christos   HOWTO(R_390_COPY,	 0, 8, 64, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
     76  1.1.1.9  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_COPY",	 false, 0,MINUS_ONE,  false),
     77  1.1.1.9  christos   HOWTO(R_390_GLOB_DAT,	 0, 8, 64, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
     78  1.1.1.9  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_GLOB_DAT", false, 0,MINUS_ONE,  false),
     79  1.1.1.9  christos   HOWTO(R_390_JMP_SLOT,	 0, 8, 64, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
     80  1.1.1.9  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_JMP_SLOT", false, 0,MINUS_ONE,  false),
     81  1.1.1.9  christos   HOWTO(R_390_RELATIVE,	 0, 8, 64,  true, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
     82  1.1.1.9  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_RELATIVE", false, 0,MINUS_ONE,  false),
     83  1.1.1.9  christos   HOWTO(R_390_GOTOFF32,	 0, 4, 32, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
     84  1.1.1.9  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_GOTOFF32", false, 0,MINUS_ONE,  false),
     85  1.1.1.9  christos   HOWTO(R_390_GOTPC,	 0, 8, 64,  true, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
     86  1.1.1.9  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_GOTPC",	 false, 0,MINUS_ONE,  true),
     87  1.1.1.9  christos   HOWTO(R_390_GOT16,	 0, 2, 16, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
     88  1.1.1.9  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_GOT16",	 false, 0,0x0000ffff, false),
     89  1.1.1.9  christos   HOWTO(R_390_PC16,	 0, 2, 16,  true, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
     90  1.1.1.9  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_PC16",	 false, 0,0x0000ffff, true),
     91  1.1.1.9  christos   HOWTO(R_390_PC16DBL,	 1, 2, 16,  true, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
     92  1.1.1.9  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_PC16DBL",	 false, 0,0x0000ffff, true),
     93  1.1.1.9  christos   HOWTO(R_390_PLT16DBL,	 1, 2, 16,  true, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
     94  1.1.1.9  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_PLT16DBL", false, 0,0x0000ffff, true),
     95  1.1.1.9  christos   HOWTO(R_390_PC32DBL,	 1, 4, 32,  true, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
     96  1.1.1.9  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_PC32DBL",	 false, 0,0xffffffff, true),
     97  1.1.1.9  christos   HOWTO(R_390_PLT32DBL,	 1, 4, 32,  true, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
     98  1.1.1.9  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_PLT32DBL", false, 0,0xffffffff, true),
     99  1.1.1.9  christos   HOWTO(R_390_GOTPCDBL,	 1, 4, 32,  true, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    100  1.1.1.9  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_GOTPCDBL", false, 0,MINUS_ONE,  true),
    101  1.1.1.9  christos   HOWTO(R_390_64,	 0, 8, 64, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    102  1.1.1.9  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_64",	 false, 0,MINUS_ONE,  false),
    103  1.1.1.9  christos   HOWTO(R_390_PC64,	 0, 8, 64,  true, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    104  1.1.1.9  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_PC64",	 false, 0,MINUS_ONE,  true),
    105  1.1.1.9  christos   HOWTO(R_390_GOT64,	 0, 8, 64, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    106  1.1.1.9  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_GOT64",	 false, 0,MINUS_ONE,  false),
    107  1.1.1.9  christos   HOWTO(R_390_PLT64,	 0, 8, 64,  true, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    108  1.1.1.9  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_PLT64",	 false, 0,MINUS_ONE,  true),
    109  1.1.1.9  christos   HOWTO(R_390_GOTENT,	 1, 4, 32,  true, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    110  1.1.1.9  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_GOTENT",	 false, 0,MINUS_ONE,  true),
    111  1.1.1.9  christos   HOWTO(R_390_GOTOFF16,	 0, 2, 16, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    112  1.1.1.9  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_GOTOFF16", false, 0,0x0000ffff, false),
    113  1.1.1.9  christos   HOWTO(R_390_GOTOFF64,	 0, 8, 64, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    114  1.1.1.9  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_GOTOFF64", false, 0,MINUS_ONE,  false),
    115  1.1.1.9  christos   HOWTO(R_390_GOTPLT12,	 0, 2, 12, false, 0, complain_overflow_dont,
    116  1.1.1.9  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_GOTPLT12", false, 0,0x00000fff, false),
    117  1.1.1.9  christos   HOWTO(R_390_GOTPLT16,	 0, 2, 16, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    118  1.1.1.9  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_GOTPLT16", false, 0,0x0000ffff, false),
    119  1.1.1.9  christos   HOWTO(R_390_GOTPLT32,	 0, 4, 32, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    120  1.1.1.9  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_GOTPLT32", false, 0,0xffffffff, false),
    121  1.1.1.9  christos   HOWTO(R_390_GOTPLT64,	 0, 8, 64, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    122  1.1.1.9  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_GOTPLT64", false, 0,MINUS_ONE,  false),
    123  1.1.1.9  christos   HOWTO(R_390_GOTPLTENT, 1, 4, 32,  true, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    124  1.1.1.9  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_GOTPLTENT",false, 0,MINUS_ONE,  true),
    125  1.1.1.9  christos   HOWTO(R_390_PLTOFF16,	 0, 2, 16, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    126  1.1.1.9  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_PLTOFF16", false, 0,0x0000ffff, false),
    127  1.1.1.9  christos   HOWTO(R_390_PLTOFF32,	 0, 4, 32, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    128  1.1.1.9  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_PLTOFF32", false, 0,0xffffffff, false),
    129  1.1.1.9  christos   HOWTO(R_390_PLTOFF64,	 0, 8, 64, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    130  1.1.1.9  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_PLTOFF64", false, 0,MINUS_ONE,  false),
    131  1.1.1.9  christos   HOWTO(R_390_TLS_LOAD, 0, 0, 0, false, 0, complain_overflow_dont,
    132  1.1.1.9  christos 	s390_tls_reloc, "R_390_TLS_LOAD", false, 0, 0, false),
    133  1.1.1.9  christos   HOWTO(R_390_TLS_GDCALL, 0, 0, 0, false, 0, complain_overflow_dont,
    134  1.1.1.9  christos 	s390_tls_reloc, "R_390_TLS_GDCALL", false, 0, 0, false),
    135  1.1.1.9  christos   HOWTO(R_390_TLS_LDCALL, 0, 0, 0, false, 0, complain_overflow_dont,
    136  1.1.1.9  christos 	s390_tls_reloc, "R_390_TLS_LDCALL", false, 0, 0, false),
    137      1.1     skrll   EMPTY_HOWTO (R_390_TLS_GD32),	/* Empty entry for R_390_TLS_GD32.  */
    138  1.1.1.9  christos   HOWTO(R_390_TLS_GD64,	 0, 8, 64, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    139  1.1.1.9  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_TLS_GD64", false, 0, MINUS_ONE, false),
    140  1.1.1.9  christos   HOWTO(R_390_TLS_GOTIE12, 0, 2, 12, false, 0, complain_overflow_dont,
    141  1.1.1.9  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_TLS_GOTIE12", false, 0, 0x00000fff, false),
    142      1.1     skrll   EMPTY_HOWTO (R_390_TLS_GOTIE32),	/* Empty entry for R_390_TLS_GOTIE32.  */
    143  1.1.1.9  christos   HOWTO(R_390_TLS_GOTIE64, 0, 8, 64, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    144  1.1.1.9  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_TLS_GOTIE64", false, 0, MINUS_ONE, false),
    145      1.1     skrll   EMPTY_HOWTO (R_390_TLS_LDM32),	/* Empty entry for R_390_TLS_LDM32.  */
    146  1.1.1.9  christos   HOWTO(R_390_TLS_LDM64, 0, 8, 64, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    147  1.1.1.9  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_TLS_LDM64", false, 0, MINUS_ONE, false),
    148      1.1     skrll   EMPTY_HOWTO (R_390_TLS_IE32),	/* Empty entry for R_390_TLS_IE32.  */
    149  1.1.1.9  christos   HOWTO(R_390_TLS_IE64,	 0, 8, 64, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    150  1.1.1.9  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_TLS_IE64", false, 0, MINUS_ONE, false),
    151  1.1.1.9  christos   HOWTO(R_390_TLS_IEENT, 1, 4, 32, true, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    152  1.1.1.9  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_TLS_IEENT", false, 0, MINUS_ONE, true),
    153      1.1     skrll   EMPTY_HOWTO (R_390_TLS_LE32),	/* Empty entry for R_390_TLS_LE32.  */
    154  1.1.1.9  christos   HOWTO(R_390_TLS_LE64,	 0, 4, 32, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    155  1.1.1.9  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_TLS_LE64", false, 0, MINUS_ONE, false),
    156      1.1     skrll   EMPTY_HOWTO (R_390_TLS_LDO32),	/* Empty entry for R_390_TLS_LDO32.  */
    157  1.1.1.9  christos   HOWTO(R_390_TLS_LDO64, 0, 8, 64, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    158  1.1.1.9  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_TLS_LDO64", false, 0, MINUS_ONE, false),
    159  1.1.1.9  christos   HOWTO(R_390_TLS_DTPMOD, 0, 8, 64, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    160  1.1.1.9  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_TLS_DTPMOD", false, 0, MINUS_ONE, false),
    161  1.1.1.9  christos   HOWTO(R_390_TLS_DTPOFF, 0, 8, 64, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    162  1.1.1.9  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_TLS_DTPOFF", false, 0, MINUS_ONE, false),
    163  1.1.1.9  christos   HOWTO(R_390_TLS_TPOFF, 0, 8, 64, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    164  1.1.1.9  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_TLS_TPOFF", false, 0, MINUS_ONE, false),
    165  1.1.1.9  christos   HOWTO(R_390_20,	 0, 4, 20, false, 8, complain_overflow_dont,
    166  1.1.1.9  christos 	s390_elf_ldisp_reloc, "R_390_20",      false, 0,0x0fffff00, false),
    167  1.1.1.9  christos   HOWTO(R_390_GOT20,	 0, 4, 20, false, 8, complain_overflow_dont,
    168  1.1.1.9  christos 	s390_elf_ldisp_reloc, "R_390_GOT20",   false, 0,0x0fffff00, false),
    169  1.1.1.9  christos   HOWTO(R_390_GOTPLT20,	 0, 4, 20, false, 8, complain_overflow_dont,
    170  1.1.1.9  christos 	s390_elf_ldisp_reloc, "R_390_GOTPLT20", false, 0,0x0fffff00, false),
    171  1.1.1.9  christos   HOWTO(R_390_TLS_GOTIE20, 0, 4, 20, false, 8, complain_overflow_dont,
    172  1.1.1.9  christos 	s390_elf_ldisp_reloc, "R_390_TLS_GOTIE20", false, 0,0x0fffff00, false),
    173  1.1.1.9  christos   HOWTO(R_390_IRELATIVE, 0, 8, 64, false, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    174  1.1.1.9  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_IRELATIVE", false, 0, MINUS_ONE, false),
    175  1.1.1.9  christos   HOWTO(R_390_PC12DBL,	 1, 2, 12,  true, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    176  1.1.1.9  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_PC12DBL",	 false, 0,0x00000fff, true),
    177  1.1.1.9  christos   HOWTO(R_390_PLT12DBL,	 1, 2, 12,  true, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    178  1.1.1.9  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_PLT12DBL", false, 0,0x00000fff, true),
    179  1.1.1.9  christos   HOWTO(R_390_PC24DBL,	 1, 4, 24,  true, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    180  1.1.1.9  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_PC24DBL",	 false, 0,0x00ffffff, true),
    181  1.1.1.9  christos   HOWTO(R_390_PLT24DBL,	 1, 4, 24,  true, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    182  1.1.1.9  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_PLT24DBL", false, 0,0x00ffffff, true),
    183      1.1     skrll };
    184      1.1     skrll 
    185      1.1     skrll /* GNU extension to record C++ vtable hierarchy.  */
    186      1.1     skrll static reloc_howto_type elf64_s390_vtinherit_howto =
    187  1.1.1.9  christos   HOWTO (R_390_GNU_VTINHERIT, 0,8,0,false,0,complain_overflow_dont, NULL, "R_390_GNU_VTINHERIT", false,0, 0, false);
    188      1.1     skrll static reloc_howto_type elf64_s390_vtentry_howto =
    189  1.1.1.9  christos   HOWTO (R_390_GNU_VTENTRY, 0,8,0,false,0,complain_overflow_dont, _bfd_elf_rel_vtable_reloc_fn,"R_390_GNU_VTENTRY", false,0,0, false);
    190      1.1     skrll 
    191      1.1     skrll static reloc_howto_type *
    192  1.1.1.7  christos elf_s390_reloc_type_lookup (bfd *abfd,
    193  1.1.1.3  christos 			    bfd_reloc_code_real_type code)
    194      1.1     skrll {
    195      1.1     skrll   switch (code)
    196      1.1     skrll     {
    197      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_NONE:
    198      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_NONE];
    199      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_8:
    200      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_8];
    201      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_12:
    202      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_12];
    203      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_16:
    204      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_16];
    205      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_32:
    206      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_32];
    207      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_CTOR:
    208      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_32];
    209      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_32_PCREL:
    210      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_PC32];
    211      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_GOT12:
    212      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOT12];
    213      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_32_GOT_PCREL:
    214      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOT32];
    215      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_PLT32:
    216      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_PLT32];
    217      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_COPY:
    218      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_COPY];
    219      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_GLOB_DAT:
    220      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GLOB_DAT];
    221      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_JMP_SLOT:
    222      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_JMP_SLOT];
    223      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_RELATIVE:
    224      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_RELATIVE];
    225      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_32_GOTOFF:
    226      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOTOFF32];
    227      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_GOTPC:
    228      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOTPC];
    229      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_GOT16:
    230      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOT16];
    231      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_16_PCREL:
    232      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_PC16];
    233  1.1.1.4  christos     case BFD_RELOC_390_PC12DBL:
    234  1.1.1.4  christos       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_PC12DBL];
    235  1.1.1.4  christos     case BFD_RELOC_390_PLT12DBL:
    236  1.1.1.4  christos       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_PLT12DBL];
    237      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_PC16DBL:
    238      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_PC16DBL];
    239      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_PLT16DBL:
    240      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_PLT16DBL];
    241  1.1.1.4  christos     case BFD_RELOC_390_PC24DBL:
    242  1.1.1.4  christos       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_PC24DBL];
    243  1.1.1.4  christos     case BFD_RELOC_390_PLT24DBL:
    244  1.1.1.4  christos       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_PLT24DBL];
    245      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_PC32DBL:
    246      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_PC32DBL];
    247      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_PLT32DBL:
    248      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_PLT32DBL];
    249      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_GOTPCDBL:
    250      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOTPCDBL];
    251      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_64:
    252      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_64];
    253      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_64_PCREL:
    254      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_PC64];
    255      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_GOT64:
    256      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOT64];
    257      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_PLT64:
    258      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_PLT64];
    259      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_GOTENT:
    260      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOTENT];
    261      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_16_GOTOFF:
    262      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOTOFF16];
    263      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_GOTOFF64:
    264      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOTOFF64];
    265      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_GOTPLT12:
    266      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOTPLT12];
    267      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_GOTPLT16:
    268      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOTPLT16];
    269      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_GOTPLT32:
    270      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOTPLT32];
    271      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_GOTPLT64:
    272      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOTPLT64];
    273      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_GOTPLTENT:
    274      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOTPLTENT];
    275      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_PLTOFF16:
    276      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_PLTOFF16];
    277      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_PLTOFF32:
    278      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_PLTOFF32];
    279      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_PLTOFF64:
    280      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_PLTOFF64];
    281      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_TLS_LOAD:
    282      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_TLS_LOAD];
    283      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_TLS_GDCALL:
    284      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_TLS_GDCALL];
    285      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_TLS_LDCALL:
    286      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_TLS_LDCALL];
    287      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_TLS_GD64:
    288      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_TLS_GD64];
    289      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_TLS_GOTIE12:
    290      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_TLS_GOTIE12];
    291      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_TLS_GOTIE64:
    292      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_TLS_GOTIE64];
    293      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_TLS_LDM64:
    294      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_TLS_LDM64];
    295      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_TLS_IE64:
    296      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_TLS_IE64];
    297      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_TLS_IEENT:
    298      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_TLS_IEENT];
    299      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_TLS_LE64:
    300      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_TLS_LE64];
    301      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_TLS_LDO64:
    302      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_TLS_LDO64];
    303      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_TLS_DTPMOD:
    304      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_TLS_DTPMOD];
    305      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_TLS_DTPOFF:
    306      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_TLS_DTPOFF];
    307      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_TLS_TPOFF:
    308      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_TLS_TPOFF];
    309      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_20:
    310      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_20];
    311      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_GOT20:
    312      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOT20];
    313      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_GOTPLT20:
    314      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOTPLT20];
    315      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_TLS_GOTIE20:
    316      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_TLS_GOTIE20];
    317  1.1.1.3  christos     case BFD_RELOC_390_IRELATIVE:
    318  1.1.1.3  christos       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_IRELATIVE];
    319      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_VTABLE_INHERIT:
    320      1.1     skrll       return &elf64_s390_vtinherit_howto;
    321      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_VTABLE_ENTRY:
    322      1.1     skrll       return &elf64_s390_vtentry_howto;
    323      1.1     skrll     default:
    324      1.1     skrll       break;
    325      1.1     skrll     }
    326  1.1.1.7  christos 
    327  1.1.1.7  christos   /* xgettext:c-format */
    328  1.1.1.7  christos   _bfd_error_handler (_("%pB: unsupported relocation type %#x"), abfd, (int) code);
    329  1.1.1.7  christos   bfd_set_error (bfd_error_bad_value);
    330  1.1.1.7  christos   return NULL;
    331      1.1     skrll }
    332      1.1     skrll 
    333      1.1     skrll static reloc_howto_type *
    334      1.1     skrll elf_s390_reloc_name_lookup (bfd *abfd ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
    335      1.1     skrll 			    const char *r_name)
    336      1.1     skrll {
    337      1.1     skrll   unsigned int i;
    338      1.1     skrll 
    339      1.1     skrll   for (i = 0;
    340      1.1     skrll        i < sizeof (elf_howto_table) / sizeof (elf_howto_table[0]);
    341      1.1     skrll        i++)
    342      1.1     skrll     if (elf_howto_table[i].name != NULL
    343      1.1     skrll 	&& strcasecmp (elf_howto_table[i].name, r_name) == 0)
    344      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[i];
    345      1.1     skrll 
    346  1.1.1.5  christos   if (strcasecmp (elf64_s390_vtinherit_howto.name, r_name) == 0)
    347  1.1.1.5  christos     return &elf64_s390_vtinherit_howto;
    348  1.1.1.5  christos   if (strcasecmp (elf64_s390_vtentry_howto.name, r_name) == 0)
    349  1.1.1.5  christos     return &elf64_s390_vtentry_howto;
    350      1.1     skrll 
    351      1.1     skrll   return NULL;
    352      1.1     skrll }
    353      1.1     skrll 
    354      1.1     skrll /* We need to use ELF64_R_TYPE so we have our own copy of this function,
    355      1.1     skrll    and elf64-s390.c has its own copy.  */
    356      1.1     skrll 
    357  1.1.1.9  christos static bool
    358  1.1.1.3  christos elf_s390_info_to_howto (bfd *abfd ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
    359  1.1.1.3  christos 			arelent *cache_ptr,
    360  1.1.1.3  christos 			Elf_Internal_Rela *dst)
    361      1.1     skrll {
    362      1.1     skrll   unsigned int r_type = ELF64_R_TYPE(dst->r_info);
    363  1.1.1.7  christos 
    364      1.1     skrll   switch (r_type)
    365      1.1     skrll     {
    366      1.1     skrll     case R_390_GNU_VTINHERIT:
    367      1.1     skrll       cache_ptr->howto = &elf64_s390_vtinherit_howto;
    368      1.1     skrll       break;
    369      1.1     skrll 
    370      1.1     skrll     case R_390_GNU_VTENTRY:
    371      1.1     skrll       cache_ptr->howto = &elf64_s390_vtentry_howto;
    372      1.1     skrll       break;
    373      1.1     skrll 
    374      1.1     skrll     default:
    375      1.1     skrll       if (r_type >= sizeof (elf_howto_table) / sizeof (elf_howto_table[0]))
    376      1.1     skrll 	{
    377  1.1.1.6  christos 	  /* xgettext:c-format */
    378  1.1.1.7  christos 	  _bfd_error_handler (_("%pB: unsupported relocation type %#x"),
    379  1.1.1.7  christos 			      abfd, r_type);
    380  1.1.1.7  christos 	  bfd_set_error (bfd_error_bad_value);
    381  1.1.1.9  christos 	  return false;
    382      1.1     skrll 	}
    383      1.1     skrll       cache_ptr->howto = &elf_howto_table[r_type];
    384      1.1     skrll     }
    385  1.1.1.9  christos   return true;
    386      1.1     skrll }
    387      1.1     skrll 
    388      1.1     skrll /* A relocation function which doesn't do anything.  */
    389      1.1     skrll static bfd_reloc_status_type
    390  1.1.1.3  christos s390_tls_reloc (bfd *abfd ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
    391  1.1.1.3  christos 		arelent *reloc_entry,
    392  1.1.1.3  christos 		asymbol *symbol ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
    393  1.1.1.3  christos 		void * data ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
    394  1.1.1.3  christos 		asection *input_section,
    395  1.1.1.3  christos 		bfd *output_bfd,
    396  1.1.1.3  christos 		char **error_message ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
    397      1.1     skrll {
    398      1.1     skrll   if (output_bfd)
    399      1.1     skrll     reloc_entry->address += input_section->output_offset;
    400      1.1     skrll   return bfd_reloc_ok;
    401      1.1     skrll }
    402      1.1     skrll 
    403      1.1     skrll /* Handle the large displacement relocs.  */
    404      1.1     skrll static bfd_reloc_status_type
    405  1.1.1.3  christos s390_elf_ldisp_reloc (bfd *abfd,
    406  1.1.1.3  christos 		      arelent *reloc_entry,
    407  1.1.1.3  christos 		      asymbol *symbol,
    408  1.1.1.3  christos 		      void * data,
    409  1.1.1.3  christos 		      asection *input_section,
    410  1.1.1.3  christos 		      bfd *output_bfd,
    411  1.1.1.3  christos 		      char **error_message ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
    412      1.1     skrll {
    413      1.1     skrll   reloc_howto_type *howto = reloc_entry->howto;
    414      1.1     skrll   bfd_vma relocation;
    415      1.1     skrll   bfd_vma insn;
    416      1.1     skrll 
    417      1.1     skrll   if (output_bfd != (bfd *) NULL
    418      1.1     skrll       && (symbol->flags & BSF_SECTION_SYM) == 0
    419      1.1     skrll       && (! howto->partial_inplace
    420      1.1     skrll 	  || reloc_entry->addend == 0))
    421      1.1     skrll     {
    422      1.1     skrll       reloc_entry->address += input_section->output_offset;
    423      1.1     skrll       return bfd_reloc_ok;
    424      1.1     skrll     }
    425      1.1     skrll   if (output_bfd != NULL)
    426      1.1     skrll     return bfd_reloc_continue;
    427      1.1     skrll 
    428      1.1     skrll   if (reloc_entry->address > bfd_get_section_limit (abfd, input_section))
    429      1.1     skrll     return bfd_reloc_outofrange;
    430      1.1     skrll 
    431      1.1     skrll   relocation = (symbol->value
    432      1.1     skrll 		+ symbol->section->output_section->vma
    433      1.1     skrll 		+ symbol->section->output_offset);
    434      1.1     skrll   relocation += reloc_entry->addend;
    435      1.1     skrll   if (howto->pc_relative)
    436      1.1     skrll     {
    437      1.1     skrll       relocation -= (input_section->output_section->vma
    438      1.1     skrll 		     + input_section->output_offset);
    439      1.1     skrll       relocation -= reloc_entry->address;
    440      1.1     skrll     }
    441      1.1     skrll 
    442  1.1.1.4  christos   insn = bfd_get_32 (abfd, (bfd_byte *) data + reloc_entry->address);
    443      1.1     skrll   insn |= (relocation & 0xfff) << 16 | (relocation & 0xff000) >> 4;
    444      1.1     skrll   bfd_put_32 (abfd, insn, (bfd_byte *) data + reloc_entry->address);
    445      1.1     skrll 
    446      1.1     skrll   if ((bfd_signed_vma) relocation < - 0x80000
    447      1.1     skrll       || (bfd_signed_vma) relocation > 0x7ffff)
    448      1.1     skrll     return bfd_reloc_overflow;
    449      1.1     skrll   else
    450      1.1     skrll     return bfd_reloc_ok;
    451      1.1     skrll }
    452      1.1     skrll 
    453  1.1.1.9  christos static bool
    454  1.1.1.3  christos elf_s390_is_local_label_name (bfd *abfd, const char *name)
    455      1.1     skrll {
    456      1.1     skrll   if (name[0] == '.' && (name[1] == 'X' || name[1] == 'L'))
    457  1.1.1.9  christos     return true;
    458      1.1     skrll 
    459      1.1     skrll   return _bfd_elf_is_local_label_name (abfd, name);
    460      1.1     skrll }
    461      1.1     skrll 
    462      1.1     skrll /* Functions for the 390 ELF linker.  */
    463      1.1     skrll 
    464      1.1     skrll /* The name of the dynamic interpreter.  This is put in the .interp
    465      1.1     skrll    section.  */
    466      1.1     skrll 
    467  1.1.1.3  christos #define ELF_DYNAMIC_INTERPRETER "/lib/ld64.so.1"
    468      1.1     skrll 
    469      1.1     skrll /* If ELIMINATE_COPY_RELOCS is non-zero, the linker will try to avoid
    470      1.1     skrll    copying dynamic variables from a shared lib into an app's dynbss
    471      1.1     skrll    section, and instead use a dynamic relocation to point into the
    472      1.1     skrll    shared lib.  */
    473      1.1     skrll #define ELIMINATE_COPY_RELOCS 1
    474      1.1     skrll 
    475      1.1     skrll /* The size in bytes of the first entry in the procedure linkage table.  */
    476      1.1     skrll #define PLT_FIRST_ENTRY_SIZE 32
    477      1.1     skrll /* The size in bytes of an entry in the procedure linkage table.  */
    478      1.1     skrll #define PLT_ENTRY_SIZE 32
    479      1.1     skrll 
    480      1.1     skrll #define GOT_ENTRY_SIZE 8
    481      1.1     skrll 
    482  1.1.1.3  christos #define RELA_ENTRY_SIZE sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela)
    483  1.1.1.3  christos 
    484  1.1.1.8  christos /* The first three entries in a global offset table are reserved,
    485      1.1     skrll    and the initial contents are unimportant (we zero them out).
    486      1.1     skrll    Subsequent entries look like this.  See the SVR4 ABI 386
    487      1.1     skrll    supplement to see how this works.  */
    488      1.1     skrll 
    489      1.1     skrll /* For the s390, simple addr offset can only be 0 - 4096.
    490      1.1     skrll    To use the full 16777216 TB address space, several instructions
    491      1.1     skrll    are needed to load an address in a register and execute
    492      1.1     skrll    a branch( or just saving the address)
    493      1.1     skrll 
    494      1.1     skrll    Furthermore, only r 0 and 1 are free to use!!!  */
    495      1.1     skrll 
    496      1.1     skrll /* The first 3 words in the GOT are then reserved.
    497      1.1     skrll    Word 0 is the address of the dynamic table.
    498      1.1     skrll    Word 1 is a pointer to a structure describing the object
    499      1.1     skrll    Word 2 is used to point to the loader entry address.
    500      1.1     skrll 
    501      1.1     skrll    The code for PLT entries looks like this:
    502      1.1     skrll 
    503      1.1     skrll    The GOT holds the address in the PLT to be executed.
    504      1.1     skrll    The loader then gets:
    505  1.1.1.5  christos    48(15) =  Pointer to the structure describing the object.
    506  1.1.1.5  christos    56(15) =  Offset in symbol table
    507      1.1     skrll    The loader  must  then find the module where the function is
    508      1.1     skrll    and insert the address in the GOT.
    509      1.1     skrll 
    510      1.1     skrll    PLT1: LARL 1,<fn>@GOTENT # 6 bytes  Load address of GOT entry in r1
    511  1.1.1.6  christos 	 LG   1,0(1)	  # 6 bytes  Load address from GOT in r1
    512  1.1.1.6  christos 	 BCR  15,1	  # 2 bytes  Jump to address
    513  1.1.1.6  christos    RET1: BASR 1,0	  # 2 bytes  Return from GOT 1st time
    514  1.1.1.8  christos 	 LGF  1,12(1)	  # 6 bytes  Load rela.plt offset into r1
    515  1.1.1.8  christos 	 BRCL 15,-x	  # 6 bytes  Jump to first PLT entry
    516  1.1.1.6  christos 	 .long ?	  # 4 bytes  offset into .rela.plt
    517      1.1     skrll 
    518      1.1     skrll    Total = 32 bytes per PLT entry
    519      1.1     skrll    Fixup at offset 2: relative address to GOT entry
    520      1.1     skrll    Fixup at offset 22: relative branch to PLT0
    521  1.1.1.3  christos    Fixup at offset 28: 32 bit offset into .rela.plt
    522      1.1     skrll 
    523  1.1.1.3  christos    A 32 bit offset into the symbol table is enough. It allows for
    524  1.1.1.3  christos    .rela.plt sections up to a size of 2 gigabyte.  A single dynamic
    525  1.1.1.3  christos    object (the main program, any shared library) is limited to 4GB in
    526  1.1.1.3  christos    size.  Having a .rela.plt of 2GB would already make the .plt
    527  1.1.1.3  christos    section bigger than 8GB.  */
    528  1.1.1.3  christos 
    529  1.1.1.3  christos static const bfd_byte elf_s390x_plt_entry[PLT_ENTRY_SIZE] =
    530  1.1.1.3  christos   {
    531  1.1.1.6  christos     0xc0, 0x10, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00,	    /* larl    %r1,.	   */
    532  1.1.1.6  christos     0xe3, 0x10, 0x10, 0x00, 0x00, 0x04,	    /* lg      %r1,0(%r1)  */
    533  1.1.1.6  christos     0x07, 0xf1,				    /* br      %r1	   */
    534  1.1.1.6  christos     0x0d, 0x10,				    /* basr    %r1,%r0	   */
    535  1.1.1.6  christos     0xe3, 0x10, 0x10, 0x0c, 0x00, 0x14,	    /* lgf     %r1,12(%r1) */
    536  1.1.1.6  christos     0xc0, 0xf4, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00,	    /* jg      first plt   */
    537  1.1.1.6  christos     0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00		    /* .long   0x00000000  */
    538  1.1.1.3  christos   };
    539      1.1     skrll 
    540      1.1     skrll /* The first PLT entry pushes the offset into the symbol table
    541  1.1.1.3  christos    from R1 onto the stack at 56(15) and the loader object info
    542  1.1.1.3  christos    at 48(15), loads the loader address in R1 and jumps to it.  */
    543      1.1     skrll 
    544      1.1     skrll /* The first entry in the PLT:
    545      1.1     skrll 
    546      1.1     skrll   PLT0:
    547      1.1     skrll      STG  1,56(15)  # r1 contains the offset into the symbol table
    548      1.1     skrll      LARL 1,_GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE # load address of global offset table
    549      1.1     skrll      MVC  48(8,15),8(1) # move loader ino (object struct address) to stack
    550      1.1     skrll      LG   1,16(1)   # get entry address of loader
    551      1.1     skrll      BCR  15,1      # jump to loader
    552      1.1     skrll 
    553      1.1     skrll      Fixup at offset 8: relative address to start of GOT.  */
    554      1.1     skrll 
    555  1.1.1.3  christos static const bfd_byte elf_s390x_first_plt_entry[PLT_FIRST_ENTRY_SIZE] =
    556  1.1.1.3  christos   {
    557  1.1.1.6  christos     0xe3, 0x10, 0xf0, 0x38, 0x00, 0x24,	    /* stg     %r1,56(%r15)	 */
    558  1.1.1.6  christos     0xc0, 0x10, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00,	    /* larl    %r1,.		 */
    559  1.1.1.6  christos     0xd2, 0x07, 0xf0, 0x30, 0x10, 0x08,	    /* mvc     48(8,%r15),8(%r1) */
    560  1.1.1.6  christos     0xe3, 0x10, 0x10, 0x10, 0x00, 0x04,	    /* lg      %r1,16(%r1)	 */
    561  1.1.1.6  christos     0x07, 0xf1,				    /* br      %r1		 */
    562  1.1.1.6  christos     0x07, 0x00,				    /* nopr    %r0		 */
    563  1.1.1.6  christos     0x07, 0x00,				    /* nopr    %r0		 */
    564  1.1.1.6  christos     0x07, 0x00				    /* nopr    %r0		 */
    565  1.1.1.3  christos   };
    566      1.1     skrll 
    567      1.1     skrll 
    568      1.1     skrll /* s390 ELF linker hash entry.  */
    569      1.1     skrll 
    570      1.1     skrll struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry
    571      1.1     skrll {
    572      1.1     skrll   struct elf_link_hash_entry elf;
    573      1.1     skrll 
    574      1.1     skrll   /* Number of GOTPLT references for a function.  */
    575      1.1     skrll   bfd_signed_vma gotplt_refcount;
    576      1.1     skrll 
    577      1.1     skrll #define GOT_UNKNOWN	0
    578      1.1     skrll #define GOT_NORMAL	1
    579      1.1     skrll #define GOT_TLS_GD	2
    580      1.1     skrll #define GOT_TLS_IE	3
    581      1.1     skrll #define GOT_TLS_IE_NLT	3
    582      1.1     skrll   unsigned char tls_type;
    583  1.1.1.3  christos 
    584  1.1.1.3  christos   /* For pointer equality reasons we might need to change the symbol
    585  1.1.1.3  christos      type from STT_GNU_IFUNC to STT_FUNC together with its value and
    586  1.1.1.3  christos      section entry.  So after alloc_dynrelocs only these values should
    587  1.1.1.3  christos      be used.  In order to check whether a symbol is IFUNC use
    588  1.1.1.3  christos      s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p.  */
    589  1.1.1.3  christos   bfd_vma ifunc_resolver_address;
    590  1.1.1.3  christos   asection *ifunc_resolver_section;
    591      1.1     skrll };
    592      1.1     skrll 
    593      1.1     skrll #define elf_s390_hash_entry(ent) \
    594      1.1     skrll   ((struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *)(ent))
    595      1.1     skrll 
    596  1.1.1.3  christos /* This structure represents an entry in the local PLT list needed for
    597  1.1.1.3  christos    local IFUNC symbols.  */
    598  1.1.1.3  christos struct plt_entry
    599  1.1.1.3  christos {
    600  1.1.1.3  christos   /* The section of the local symbol.
    601  1.1.1.3  christos      Set in relocate_section and used in finish_dynamic_sections.  */
    602  1.1.1.3  christos   asection *sec;
    603  1.1.1.3  christos 
    604  1.1.1.3  christos   union
    605  1.1.1.3  christos     {
    606  1.1.1.3  christos       bfd_signed_vma refcount;
    607  1.1.1.3  christos       bfd_vma offset;
    608  1.1.1.3  christos     } plt;
    609  1.1.1.3  christos };
    610  1.1.1.3  christos 
    611      1.1     skrll /* NOTE: Keep this structure in sync with
    612      1.1     skrll    the one declared in elf32-s390.c.  */
    613      1.1     skrll struct elf_s390_obj_tdata
    614      1.1     skrll {
    615      1.1     skrll   struct elf_obj_tdata root;
    616      1.1     skrll 
    617  1.1.1.3  christos   /* A local PLT is needed for ifunc symbols.  */
    618  1.1.1.3  christos   struct plt_entry *local_plt;
    619  1.1.1.3  christos 
    620      1.1     skrll   /* TLS type for each local got entry.  */
    621      1.1     skrll   char *local_got_tls_type;
    622      1.1     skrll };
    623      1.1     skrll 
    624      1.1     skrll #define elf_s390_tdata(abfd) \
    625      1.1     skrll   ((struct elf_s390_obj_tdata *) (abfd)->tdata.any)
    626      1.1     skrll 
    627  1.1.1.3  christos #define elf_s390_local_plt(abfd) \
    628  1.1.1.3  christos   (elf_s390_tdata (abfd)->local_plt)
    629  1.1.1.3  christos 
    630      1.1     skrll #define elf_s390_local_got_tls_type(abfd) \
    631      1.1     skrll   (elf_s390_tdata (abfd)->local_got_tls_type)
    632      1.1     skrll 
    633      1.1     skrll #define is_s390_elf(bfd)				\
    634      1.1     skrll   (bfd_get_flavour (bfd) == bfd_target_elf_flavour	\
    635      1.1     skrll    && elf_tdata (bfd) != NULL				\
    636  1.1.1.2  christos    && elf_object_id (bfd) == S390_ELF_DATA)
    637      1.1     skrll 
    638  1.1.1.9  christos static bool
    639      1.1     skrll elf_s390_mkobject (bfd *abfd)
    640      1.1     skrll {
    641      1.1     skrll   return bfd_elf_allocate_object (abfd, sizeof (struct elf_s390_obj_tdata),
    642  1.1.1.2  christos 				  S390_ELF_DATA);
    643      1.1     skrll }
    644      1.1     skrll 
    645  1.1.1.9  christos static bool
    646  1.1.1.3  christos elf_s390_object_p (bfd *abfd)
    647      1.1     skrll {
    648      1.1     skrll   /* Set the right machine number for an s390 elf32 file.  */
    649      1.1     skrll   return bfd_default_set_arch_mach (abfd, bfd_arch_s390, bfd_mach_s390_64);
    650      1.1     skrll }
    651      1.1     skrll 
    652      1.1     skrll /* s390 ELF linker hash table.  */
    653      1.1     skrll 
    654      1.1     skrll struct elf_s390_link_hash_table
    655      1.1     skrll {
    656      1.1     skrll   struct elf_link_hash_table elf;
    657      1.1     skrll 
    658      1.1     skrll   /* Short-cuts to get to dynamic linker sections.  */
    659  1.1.1.3  christos   asection *irelifunc;
    660      1.1     skrll 
    661      1.1     skrll   union {
    662      1.1     skrll     bfd_signed_vma refcount;
    663      1.1     skrll     bfd_vma offset;
    664      1.1     skrll   } tls_ldm_got;
    665      1.1     skrll 
    666  1.1.1.6  christos   /* Options passed from the linker.  */
    667  1.1.1.6  christos   struct s390_elf_params *params;
    668      1.1     skrll };
    669      1.1     skrll 
    670      1.1     skrll /* Get the s390 ELF linker hash table from a link_info structure.  */
    671      1.1     skrll 
    672  1.1.1.6  christos #define elf_s390_hash_table(p)						\
    673  1.1.1.9  christos   ((is_elf_hash_table ((p)->hash)					\
    674  1.1.1.9  christos     && elf_hash_table_id (elf_hash_table (p)) == S390_ELF_DATA)		\
    675  1.1.1.9  christos    ? (struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *) (p)->hash : NULL)
    676      1.1     skrll 
    677  1.1.1.3  christos #define ELF64 1
    678  1.1.1.3  christos #include "elf-s390-common.c"
    679  1.1.1.3  christos 
    680      1.1     skrll /* Create an entry in an s390 ELF linker hash table.  */
    681      1.1     skrll 
    682      1.1     skrll static struct bfd_hash_entry *
    683  1.1.1.3  christos link_hash_newfunc (struct bfd_hash_entry *entry,
    684  1.1.1.3  christos 		   struct bfd_hash_table *table,
    685  1.1.1.3  christos 		   const char *string)
    686      1.1     skrll {
    687      1.1     skrll   /* Allocate the structure if it has not already been allocated by a
    688      1.1     skrll      subclass.  */
    689      1.1     skrll   if (entry == NULL)
    690      1.1     skrll     {
    691      1.1     skrll       entry = bfd_hash_allocate (table,
    692      1.1     skrll 				 sizeof (struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry));
    693      1.1     skrll       if (entry == NULL)
    694      1.1     skrll 	return entry;
    695      1.1     skrll     }
    696      1.1     skrll 
    697      1.1     skrll   /* Call the allocation method of the superclass.  */
    698      1.1     skrll   entry = _bfd_elf_link_hash_newfunc (entry, table, string);
    699      1.1     skrll   if (entry != NULL)
    700      1.1     skrll     {
    701      1.1     skrll       struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *eh;
    702      1.1     skrll 
    703      1.1     skrll       eh = (struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *) entry;
    704      1.1     skrll       eh->gotplt_refcount = 0;
    705      1.1     skrll       eh->tls_type = GOT_UNKNOWN;
    706  1.1.1.3  christos       eh->ifunc_resolver_address = 0;
    707  1.1.1.3  christos       eh->ifunc_resolver_section = NULL;
    708      1.1     skrll     }
    709      1.1     skrll 
    710      1.1     skrll   return entry;
    711      1.1     skrll }
    712      1.1     skrll 
    713      1.1     skrll /* Create an s390 ELF linker hash table.  */
    714      1.1     skrll 
    715      1.1     skrll static struct bfd_link_hash_table *
    716  1.1.1.3  christos elf_s390_link_hash_table_create (bfd *abfd)
    717      1.1     skrll {
    718      1.1     skrll   struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *ret;
    719  1.1.1.9  christos   size_t amt = sizeof (struct elf_s390_link_hash_table);
    720      1.1     skrll 
    721  1.1.1.4  christos   ret = (struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *) bfd_zmalloc (amt);
    722      1.1     skrll   if (ret == NULL)
    723      1.1     skrll     return NULL;
    724      1.1     skrll 
    725      1.1     skrll   if (!_bfd_elf_link_hash_table_init (&ret->elf, abfd, link_hash_newfunc,
    726  1.1.1.2  christos 				      sizeof (struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry),
    727  1.1.1.2  christos 				      S390_ELF_DATA))
    728      1.1     skrll     {
    729      1.1     skrll       free (ret);
    730      1.1     skrll       return NULL;
    731      1.1     skrll     }
    732      1.1     skrll 
    733      1.1     skrll   return &ret->elf.root;
    734      1.1     skrll }
    735      1.1     skrll 
    736      1.1     skrll /* Copy the extra info we tack onto an elf_link_hash_entry.  */
    737      1.1     skrll 
    738      1.1     skrll static void
    739  1.1.1.3  christos elf_s390_copy_indirect_symbol (struct bfd_link_info *info,
    740  1.1.1.3  christos 			       struct elf_link_hash_entry *dir,
    741  1.1.1.3  christos 			       struct elf_link_hash_entry *ind)
    742      1.1     skrll {
    743      1.1     skrll   struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *edir, *eind;
    744      1.1     skrll 
    745      1.1     skrll   edir = (struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *) dir;
    746      1.1     skrll   eind = (struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *) ind;
    747      1.1     skrll 
    748      1.1     skrll   if (ind->root.type == bfd_link_hash_indirect
    749      1.1     skrll       && dir->got.refcount <= 0)
    750      1.1     skrll     {
    751      1.1     skrll       edir->tls_type = eind->tls_type;
    752      1.1     skrll       eind->tls_type = GOT_UNKNOWN;
    753      1.1     skrll     }
    754      1.1     skrll 
    755      1.1     skrll   if (ELIMINATE_COPY_RELOCS
    756      1.1     skrll       && ind->root.type != bfd_link_hash_indirect
    757      1.1     skrll       && dir->dynamic_adjusted)
    758      1.1     skrll     {
    759      1.1     skrll       /* If called to transfer flags for a weakdef during processing
    760      1.1     skrll 	 of elf_adjust_dynamic_symbol, don't copy non_got_ref.
    761      1.1     skrll 	 We clear it ourselves for ELIMINATE_COPY_RELOCS.  */
    762  1.1.1.6  christos       if (dir->versioned != versioned_hidden)
    763  1.1.1.6  christos 	dir->ref_dynamic |= ind->ref_dynamic;
    764      1.1     skrll       dir->ref_regular |= ind->ref_regular;
    765      1.1     skrll       dir->ref_regular_nonweak |= ind->ref_regular_nonweak;
    766      1.1     skrll       dir->needs_plt |= ind->needs_plt;
    767      1.1     skrll     }
    768      1.1     skrll   else
    769      1.1     skrll     _bfd_elf_link_hash_copy_indirect (info, dir, ind);
    770      1.1     skrll }
    771      1.1     skrll 
    772      1.1     skrll static int
    773  1.1.1.3  christos elf_s390_tls_transition (struct bfd_link_info *info,
    774  1.1.1.3  christos 			 int r_type,
    775  1.1.1.3  christos 			 int is_local)
    776      1.1     skrll {
    777  1.1.1.9  christos   if (bfd_link_dll (info))
    778      1.1     skrll     return r_type;
    779      1.1     skrll 
    780      1.1     skrll   switch (r_type)
    781      1.1     skrll     {
    782      1.1     skrll     case R_390_TLS_GD64:
    783      1.1     skrll     case R_390_TLS_IE64:
    784      1.1     skrll       if (is_local)
    785      1.1     skrll 	return R_390_TLS_LE64;
    786      1.1     skrll       return R_390_TLS_IE64;
    787      1.1     skrll     case R_390_TLS_GOTIE64:
    788      1.1     skrll       if (is_local)
    789      1.1     skrll 	return R_390_TLS_LE64;
    790      1.1     skrll       return R_390_TLS_GOTIE64;
    791      1.1     skrll     case R_390_TLS_LDM64:
    792      1.1     skrll       return R_390_TLS_LE64;
    793      1.1     skrll     }
    794      1.1     skrll 
    795      1.1     skrll   return r_type;
    796      1.1     skrll }
    797      1.1     skrll 
    798      1.1     skrll /* Look through the relocs for a section during the first phase, and
    799      1.1     skrll    allocate space in the global offset table or procedure linkage
    800      1.1     skrll    table.  */
    801      1.1     skrll 
    802  1.1.1.9  christos static bool
    803  1.1.1.2  christos elf_s390_check_relocs (bfd *abfd,
    804  1.1.1.2  christos 		       struct bfd_link_info *info,
    805  1.1.1.2  christos 		       asection *sec,
    806  1.1.1.2  christos 		       const Elf_Internal_Rela *relocs)
    807      1.1     skrll {
    808      1.1     skrll   struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *htab;
    809      1.1     skrll   Elf_Internal_Shdr *symtab_hdr;
    810      1.1     skrll   struct elf_link_hash_entry **sym_hashes;
    811      1.1     skrll   const Elf_Internal_Rela *rel;
    812      1.1     skrll   const Elf_Internal_Rela *rel_end;
    813      1.1     skrll   asection *sreloc;
    814      1.1     skrll   bfd_signed_vma *local_got_refcounts;
    815      1.1     skrll   int tls_type, old_tls_type;
    816      1.1     skrll 
    817  1.1.1.4  christos   if (bfd_link_relocatable (info))
    818  1.1.1.9  christos     return true;
    819      1.1     skrll 
    820      1.1     skrll   BFD_ASSERT (is_s390_elf (abfd));
    821      1.1     skrll 
    822      1.1     skrll   htab = elf_s390_hash_table (info);
    823  1.1.1.2  christos   if (htab == NULL)
    824  1.1.1.9  christos     return false;
    825  1.1.1.2  christos 
    826      1.1     skrll   symtab_hdr = &elf_symtab_hdr (abfd);
    827      1.1     skrll   sym_hashes = elf_sym_hashes (abfd);
    828      1.1     skrll   local_got_refcounts = elf_local_got_refcounts (abfd);
    829      1.1     skrll 
    830      1.1     skrll   sreloc = NULL;
    831      1.1     skrll 
    832      1.1     skrll   rel_end = relocs + sec->reloc_count;
    833      1.1     skrll   for (rel = relocs; rel < rel_end; rel++)
    834      1.1     skrll     {
    835      1.1     skrll       unsigned int r_type;
    836  1.1.1.6  christos       unsigned int r_symndx;
    837      1.1     skrll       struct elf_link_hash_entry *h;
    838  1.1.1.3  christos       Elf_Internal_Sym *isym;
    839      1.1     skrll 
    840      1.1     skrll       r_symndx = ELF64_R_SYM (rel->r_info);
    841      1.1     skrll 
    842      1.1     skrll       if (r_symndx >= NUM_SHDR_ENTRIES (symtab_hdr))
    843      1.1     skrll 	{
    844  1.1.1.6  christos 	  /* xgettext:c-format */
    845  1.1.1.7  christos 	  _bfd_error_handler (_("%pB: bad symbol index: %d"),
    846  1.1.1.6  christos 			      abfd, r_symndx);
    847  1.1.1.9  christos 	  return false;
    848      1.1     skrll 	}
    849      1.1     skrll 
    850      1.1     skrll       if (r_symndx < symtab_hdr->sh_info)
    851  1.1.1.3  christos 	{
    852  1.1.1.3  christos 	  /* A local symbol.  */
    853  1.1.1.9  christos 	  isym = bfd_sym_from_r_symndx (&htab->elf.sym_cache,
    854  1.1.1.3  christos 					abfd, r_symndx);
    855  1.1.1.3  christos 	  if (isym == NULL)
    856  1.1.1.9  christos 	    return false;
    857  1.1.1.3  christos 
    858  1.1.1.3  christos 	  if (ELF_ST_TYPE (isym->st_info) == STT_GNU_IFUNC)
    859  1.1.1.3  christos 	    {
    860  1.1.1.3  christos 	      struct plt_entry *plt;
    861  1.1.1.3  christos 
    862  1.1.1.3  christos 	      if (htab->elf.dynobj == NULL)
    863  1.1.1.3  christos 		htab->elf.dynobj = abfd;
    864  1.1.1.3  christos 
    865  1.1.1.3  christos 	      if (!s390_elf_create_ifunc_sections (htab->elf.dynobj, info))
    866  1.1.1.9  christos 		return false;
    867  1.1.1.3  christos 
    868  1.1.1.3  christos 	      if (local_got_refcounts == NULL)
    869  1.1.1.3  christos 		{
    870  1.1.1.3  christos 		  if (!elf_s390_allocate_local_syminfo (abfd, symtab_hdr))
    871  1.1.1.9  christos 		    return false;
    872  1.1.1.3  christos 		  local_got_refcounts = elf_local_got_refcounts (abfd);
    873  1.1.1.3  christos 		}
    874  1.1.1.3  christos 	      plt = elf_s390_local_plt (abfd);
    875  1.1.1.3  christos 	      plt[r_symndx].plt.refcount++;
    876  1.1.1.3  christos 	    }
    877  1.1.1.3  christos 	  h = NULL;
    878  1.1.1.3  christos 	}
    879      1.1     skrll       else
    880      1.1     skrll 	{
    881      1.1     skrll 	  h = sym_hashes[r_symndx - symtab_hdr->sh_info];
    882      1.1     skrll 	  while (h->root.type == bfd_link_hash_indirect
    883      1.1     skrll 		 || h->root.type == bfd_link_hash_warning)
    884      1.1     skrll 	    h = (struct elf_link_hash_entry *) h->root.u.i.link;
    885      1.1     skrll 	}
    886      1.1     skrll 
    887      1.1     skrll       /* Create got section and local_got_refcounts array if they
    888      1.1     skrll 	 are needed.  */
    889      1.1     skrll       r_type = elf_s390_tls_transition (info,
    890      1.1     skrll 					ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info),
    891      1.1     skrll 					h == NULL);
    892      1.1     skrll       switch (r_type)
    893      1.1     skrll 	{
    894      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOT12:
    895      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOT16:
    896      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOT20:
    897      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOT32:
    898      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOT64:
    899      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTENT:
    900      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTPLT12:
    901      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTPLT16:
    902      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTPLT20:
    903      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTPLT32:
    904      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTPLT64:
    905      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTPLTENT:
    906      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_GD64:
    907      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_GOTIE12:
    908      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_GOTIE20:
    909      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_GOTIE64:
    910      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_IEENT:
    911      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_IE64:
    912      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_LDM64:
    913      1.1     skrll 	  if (h == NULL
    914      1.1     skrll 	      && local_got_refcounts == NULL)
    915      1.1     skrll 	    {
    916  1.1.1.3  christos 	      if (!elf_s390_allocate_local_syminfo (abfd, symtab_hdr))
    917  1.1.1.9  christos 		return false;
    918  1.1.1.3  christos 	      local_got_refcounts = elf_local_got_refcounts (abfd);
    919      1.1     skrll 	    }
    920  1.1.1.3  christos 
    921      1.1     skrll 	  /* Fall through.  */
    922      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTOFF16:
    923      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTOFF32:
    924      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTOFF64:
    925      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTPC:
    926      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTPCDBL:
    927  1.1.1.3  christos 	  if (htab->elf.sgot == NULL)
    928      1.1     skrll 	    {
    929      1.1     skrll 	      if (htab->elf.dynobj == NULL)
    930      1.1     skrll 		htab->elf.dynobj = abfd;
    931  1.1.1.6  christos 	      if (!_bfd_elf_create_got_section (htab->elf.dynobj, info))
    932  1.1.1.9  christos 		return false;
    933      1.1     skrll 	    }
    934      1.1     skrll 	}
    935      1.1     skrll 
    936  1.1.1.3  christos       if (h != NULL)
    937  1.1.1.3  christos 	{
    938  1.1.1.3  christos 	  if (htab->elf.dynobj == NULL)
    939  1.1.1.3  christos 	    htab->elf.dynobj = abfd;
    940  1.1.1.3  christos 	  if (!s390_elf_create_ifunc_sections (htab->elf.dynobj, info))
    941  1.1.1.9  christos 	    return false;
    942  1.1.1.3  christos 
    943  1.1.1.3  christos 	  /* Make sure an IFUNC symbol defined in a non-shared object
    944  1.1.1.3  christos 	     always gets a PLT slot.  */
    945  1.1.1.3  christos 	  if (s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p (h) && h->def_regular)
    946  1.1.1.3  christos 	    {
    947  1.1.1.3  christos 	      /* The symbol is called by the dynamic loader in order
    948  1.1.1.3  christos 		 to resolve the relocation.  So it is in fact also
    949  1.1.1.3  christos 		 referenced.  */
    950  1.1.1.3  christos 	      h->ref_regular = 1;
    951  1.1.1.3  christos 	      h->needs_plt = 1;
    952  1.1.1.3  christos 	    }
    953  1.1.1.3  christos 	}
    954  1.1.1.3  christos 
    955      1.1     skrll       switch (r_type)
    956      1.1     skrll 	{
    957      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTPC:
    958      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTPCDBL:
    959  1.1.1.3  christos 	  /* These relocs do not need a GOT slot.  They just load the
    960  1.1.1.3  christos 	     GOT pointer itself or address something else relative to
    961  1.1.1.3  christos 	     the GOT.  Since the GOT pointer has been set up above we
    962  1.1.1.3  christos 	     are done.  */
    963      1.1     skrll 	  break;
    964  1.1.1.4  christos 	case R_390_GOTOFF16:
    965  1.1.1.4  christos 	case R_390_GOTOFF32:
    966  1.1.1.4  christos 	case R_390_GOTOFF64:
    967  1.1.1.4  christos 	  if (h == NULL || !s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p (h) || !h->def_regular)
    968  1.1.1.4  christos 	    break;
    969  1.1.1.6  christos 	  /* Fall through.  */
    970      1.1     skrll 
    971  1.1.1.4  christos 	case R_390_PLT12DBL:
    972      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PLT16DBL:
    973  1.1.1.4  christos 	case R_390_PLT24DBL:
    974      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PLT32:
    975      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PLT32DBL:
    976      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PLT64:
    977      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PLTOFF16:
    978      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PLTOFF32:
    979      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PLTOFF64:
    980      1.1     skrll 	  /* This symbol requires a procedure linkage table entry.  We
    981      1.1     skrll 	     actually build the entry in adjust_dynamic_symbol,
    982      1.1     skrll 	     because this might be a case of linking PIC code which is
    983      1.1     skrll 	     never referenced by a dynamic object, in which case we
    984      1.1     skrll 	     don't need to generate a procedure linkage table entry
    985      1.1     skrll 	     after all.  */
    986      1.1     skrll 
    987      1.1     skrll 	  /* If this is a local symbol, we resolve it directly without
    988      1.1     skrll 	     creating a procedure linkage table entry.  */
    989      1.1     skrll 	  if (h != NULL)
    990      1.1     skrll 	    {
    991      1.1     skrll 	      h->needs_plt = 1;
    992      1.1     skrll 	      h->plt.refcount += 1;
    993      1.1     skrll 	    }
    994      1.1     skrll 	  break;
    995      1.1     skrll 
    996      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTPLT12:
    997      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTPLT16:
    998      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTPLT20:
    999      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTPLT32:
   1000      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTPLT64:
   1001      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTPLTENT:
   1002      1.1     skrll 	  /* This symbol requires either a procedure linkage table entry
   1003      1.1     skrll 	     or an entry in the local got. We actually build the entry
   1004      1.1     skrll 	     in adjust_dynamic_symbol because whether this is really a
   1005      1.1     skrll 	     global reference can change and with it the fact if we have
   1006      1.1     skrll 	     to create a plt entry or a local got entry. To be able to
   1007      1.1     skrll 	     make a once global symbol a local one we have to keep track
   1008      1.1     skrll 	     of the number of gotplt references that exist for this
   1009      1.1     skrll 	     symbol.  */
   1010      1.1     skrll 	  if (h != NULL)
   1011      1.1     skrll 	    {
   1012      1.1     skrll 	      ((struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *) h)->gotplt_refcount++;
   1013      1.1     skrll 	      h->needs_plt = 1;
   1014      1.1     skrll 	      h->plt.refcount += 1;
   1015      1.1     skrll 	    }
   1016      1.1     skrll 	  else
   1017      1.1     skrll 	    local_got_refcounts[r_symndx] += 1;
   1018      1.1     skrll 	  break;
   1019      1.1     skrll 
   1020      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_LDM64:
   1021      1.1     skrll 	  htab->tls_ldm_got.refcount += 1;
   1022      1.1     skrll 	  break;
   1023      1.1     skrll 
   1024      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_IE64:
   1025      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_GOTIE12:
   1026      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_GOTIE20:
   1027      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_GOTIE64:
   1028      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_IEENT:
   1029  1.1.1.9  christos 	  if (bfd_link_dll (info))
   1030      1.1     skrll 	    info->flags |= DF_STATIC_TLS;
   1031      1.1     skrll 	  /* Fall through */
   1032      1.1     skrll 
   1033      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOT12:
   1034      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOT16:
   1035      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOT20:
   1036      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOT32:
   1037      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOT64:
   1038      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTENT:
   1039      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_GD64:
   1040      1.1     skrll 	  /* This symbol requires a global offset table entry.  */
   1041      1.1     skrll 	  switch (r_type)
   1042      1.1     skrll 	    {
   1043      1.1     skrll 	    default:
   1044      1.1     skrll 	    case R_390_GOT12:
   1045      1.1     skrll 	    case R_390_GOT16:
   1046      1.1     skrll 	    case R_390_GOT20:
   1047      1.1     skrll 	    case R_390_GOT32:
   1048      1.1     skrll 	    case R_390_GOTENT:
   1049      1.1     skrll 	      tls_type = GOT_NORMAL;
   1050      1.1     skrll 	      break;
   1051      1.1     skrll 	    case R_390_TLS_GD64:
   1052      1.1     skrll 	      tls_type = GOT_TLS_GD;
   1053      1.1     skrll 	      break;
   1054      1.1     skrll 	    case R_390_TLS_IE64:
   1055      1.1     skrll 	    case R_390_TLS_GOTIE64:
   1056      1.1     skrll 	      tls_type = GOT_TLS_IE;
   1057      1.1     skrll 	      break;
   1058      1.1     skrll 	    case R_390_TLS_GOTIE12:
   1059      1.1     skrll 	    case R_390_TLS_GOTIE20:
   1060      1.1     skrll 	    case R_390_TLS_IEENT:
   1061      1.1     skrll 	      tls_type = GOT_TLS_IE_NLT;
   1062      1.1     skrll 	      break;
   1063      1.1     skrll 	    }
   1064      1.1     skrll 
   1065      1.1     skrll 	  if (h != NULL)
   1066      1.1     skrll 	    {
   1067      1.1     skrll 	      h->got.refcount += 1;
   1068      1.1     skrll 	      old_tls_type = elf_s390_hash_entry(h)->tls_type;
   1069      1.1     skrll 	    }
   1070      1.1     skrll 	  else
   1071      1.1     skrll 	    {
   1072      1.1     skrll 	      local_got_refcounts[r_symndx] += 1;
   1073      1.1     skrll 	      old_tls_type = elf_s390_local_got_tls_type (abfd) [r_symndx];
   1074      1.1     skrll 	    }
   1075      1.1     skrll 	  /* If a TLS symbol is accessed using IE at least once,
   1076      1.1     skrll 	     there is no point to use dynamic model for it.  */
   1077      1.1     skrll 	  if (old_tls_type != tls_type && old_tls_type != GOT_UNKNOWN)
   1078      1.1     skrll 	    {
   1079      1.1     skrll 	      if (old_tls_type == GOT_NORMAL || tls_type == GOT_NORMAL)
   1080      1.1     skrll 		{
   1081  1.1.1.6  christos 		  _bfd_error_handler
   1082  1.1.1.6  christos 		    /* xgettext:c-format */
   1083  1.1.1.7  christos 		    (_("%pB: `%s' accessed both as normal and thread local symbol"),
   1084      1.1     skrll 		     abfd, h->root.root.string);
   1085  1.1.1.9  christos 		  return false;
   1086      1.1     skrll 		}
   1087      1.1     skrll 	      if (old_tls_type > tls_type)
   1088      1.1     skrll 		tls_type = old_tls_type;
   1089      1.1     skrll 	    }
   1090      1.1     skrll 
   1091      1.1     skrll 	  if (old_tls_type != tls_type)
   1092      1.1     skrll 	    {
   1093      1.1     skrll 	      if (h != NULL)
   1094      1.1     skrll 		elf_s390_hash_entry (h)->tls_type = tls_type;
   1095      1.1     skrll 	      else
   1096      1.1     skrll 		elf_s390_local_got_tls_type (abfd) [r_symndx] = tls_type;
   1097      1.1     skrll 	    }
   1098      1.1     skrll 
   1099      1.1     skrll 	  if (r_type != R_390_TLS_IE64)
   1100      1.1     skrll 	    break;
   1101      1.1     skrll 	  /* Fall through */
   1102      1.1     skrll 
   1103      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_LE64:
   1104  1.1.1.4  christos 	  /* For static linking and executables this reloc will be
   1105  1.1.1.4  christos 	     calculated at linktime otherwise a TLS_TPOFF runtime
   1106  1.1.1.4  christos 	     reloc will be generated.  */
   1107  1.1.1.4  christos 	  if (r_type == R_390_TLS_LE64 && bfd_link_pie (info))
   1108  1.1.1.4  christos 	    break;
   1109  1.1.1.4  christos 
   1110  1.1.1.9  christos 	  if (!bfd_link_dll (info))
   1111      1.1     skrll 	    break;
   1112      1.1     skrll 	  info->flags |= DF_STATIC_TLS;
   1113      1.1     skrll 	  /* Fall through */
   1114      1.1     skrll 
   1115      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_8:
   1116      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_16:
   1117      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_32:
   1118      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_64:
   1119  1.1.1.4  christos 	case R_390_PC12DBL:
   1120      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PC16:
   1121      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PC16DBL:
   1122  1.1.1.4  christos 	case R_390_PC24DBL:
   1123      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PC32:
   1124      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PC32DBL:
   1125      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PC64:
   1126  1.1.1.4  christos 	  if (h != NULL && bfd_link_executable (info))
   1127      1.1     skrll 	    {
   1128      1.1     skrll 	      /* If this reloc is in a read-only section, we might
   1129      1.1     skrll 		 need a copy reloc.  We can't check reliably at this
   1130      1.1     skrll 		 stage whether the section is read-only, as input
   1131      1.1     skrll 		 sections have not yet been mapped to output sections.
   1132      1.1     skrll 		 Tentatively set the flag for now, and correct in
   1133      1.1     skrll 		 adjust_dynamic_symbol.  */
   1134      1.1     skrll 	      h->non_got_ref = 1;
   1135      1.1     skrll 
   1136  1.1.1.4  christos 	      if (!bfd_link_pic (info))
   1137  1.1.1.3  christos 		{
   1138  1.1.1.3  christos 		  /* We may need a .plt entry if the function this reloc
   1139  1.1.1.3  christos 		     refers to is in a shared lib.  */
   1140  1.1.1.3  christos 		  h->plt.refcount += 1;
   1141  1.1.1.3  christos 		}
   1142      1.1     skrll 	    }
   1143      1.1     skrll 
   1144      1.1     skrll 	  /* If we are creating a shared library, and this is a reloc
   1145      1.1     skrll 	     against a global symbol, or a non PC relative reloc
   1146      1.1     skrll 	     against a local symbol, then we need to copy the reloc
   1147      1.1     skrll 	     into the shared library.  However, if we are linking with
   1148      1.1     skrll 	     -Bsymbolic, we do not need to copy a reloc against a
   1149      1.1     skrll 	     global symbol which is defined in an object we are
   1150      1.1     skrll 	     including in the link (i.e., DEF_REGULAR is set).  At
   1151      1.1     skrll 	     this point we have not seen all the input files, so it is
   1152      1.1     skrll 	     possible that DEF_REGULAR is not set now but will be set
   1153      1.1     skrll 	     later (it is never cleared).  In case of a weak definition,
   1154      1.1     skrll 	     DEF_REGULAR may be cleared later by a strong definition in
   1155      1.1     skrll 	     a shared library. We account for that possibility below by
   1156      1.1     skrll 	     storing information in the relocs_copied field of the hash
   1157      1.1     skrll 	     table entry.  A similar situation occurs when creating
   1158      1.1     skrll 	     shared libraries and symbol visibility changes render the
   1159      1.1     skrll 	     symbol local.
   1160      1.1     skrll 
   1161      1.1     skrll 	     If on the other hand, we are creating an executable, we
   1162      1.1     skrll 	     may need to keep relocations for symbols satisfied by a
   1163      1.1     skrll 	     dynamic library if we manage to avoid copy relocs for the
   1164      1.1     skrll 	     symbol.  */
   1165  1.1.1.4  christos 	  if ((bfd_link_pic (info)
   1166      1.1     skrll 	       && (sec->flags & SEC_ALLOC) != 0
   1167      1.1     skrll 	       && ((ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info) != R_390_PC16
   1168  1.1.1.4  christos 		    && ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info) != R_390_PC12DBL
   1169      1.1     skrll 		    && ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info) != R_390_PC16DBL
   1170  1.1.1.4  christos 		    && ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info) != R_390_PC24DBL
   1171      1.1     skrll 		    && ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info) != R_390_PC32
   1172      1.1     skrll 		    && ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info) != R_390_PC32DBL
   1173      1.1     skrll 		    && ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info) != R_390_PC64)
   1174      1.1     skrll 		   || (h != NULL
   1175  1.1.1.2  christos 		       && (! SYMBOLIC_BIND (info, h)
   1176      1.1     skrll 			   || h->root.type == bfd_link_hash_defweak
   1177      1.1     skrll 			   || !h->def_regular))))
   1178      1.1     skrll 	      || (ELIMINATE_COPY_RELOCS
   1179  1.1.1.4  christos 		  && !bfd_link_pic (info)
   1180      1.1     skrll 		  && (sec->flags & SEC_ALLOC) != 0
   1181      1.1     skrll 		  && h != NULL
   1182      1.1     skrll 		  && (h->root.type == bfd_link_hash_defweak
   1183      1.1     skrll 		      || !h->def_regular)))
   1184      1.1     skrll 	    {
   1185  1.1.1.3  christos 	      struct elf_dyn_relocs *p;
   1186  1.1.1.3  christos 	      struct elf_dyn_relocs **head;
   1187      1.1     skrll 
   1188      1.1     skrll 	      /* We must copy these reloc types into the output file.
   1189      1.1     skrll 		 Create a reloc section in dynobj and make room for
   1190      1.1     skrll 		 this reloc.  */
   1191      1.1     skrll 	      if (sreloc == NULL)
   1192      1.1     skrll 		{
   1193      1.1     skrll 		  if (htab->elf.dynobj == NULL)
   1194      1.1     skrll 		    htab->elf.dynobj = abfd;
   1195      1.1     skrll 
   1196  1.1.1.2  christos 		  sreloc = _bfd_elf_make_dynamic_reloc_section
   1197  1.1.1.9  christos 		    (sec, htab->elf.dynobj, 3, abfd, /*rela?*/ true);
   1198      1.1     skrll 
   1199  1.1.1.2  christos 		  if (sreloc == NULL)
   1200  1.1.1.9  christos 		    return false;
   1201      1.1     skrll 		}
   1202      1.1     skrll 
   1203      1.1     skrll 	      /* If this is a global symbol, we count the number of
   1204      1.1     skrll 		 relocations we need for this symbol.  */
   1205      1.1     skrll 	      if (h != NULL)
   1206      1.1     skrll 		{
   1207  1.1.1.9  christos 		  head = &h->dyn_relocs;
   1208      1.1     skrll 		}
   1209      1.1     skrll 	      else
   1210      1.1     skrll 		{
   1211      1.1     skrll 		  /* Track dynamic relocs needed for local syms too.
   1212      1.1     skrll 		     We really need local syms available to do this
   1213      1.1     skrll 		     easily.  Oh well.  */
   1214      1.1     skrll 		  asection *s;
   1215      1.1     skrll 		  void *vpp;
   1216      1.1     skrll 
   1217  1.1.1.9  christos 		  isym = bfd_sym_from_r_symndx (&htab->elf.sym_cache,
   1218  1.1.1.2  christos 						abfd, r_symndx);
   1219  1.1.1.2  christos 		  if (isym == NULL)
   1220  1.1.1.9  christos 		    return false;
   1221      1.1     skrll 
   1222  1.1.1.2  christos 		  s = bfd_section_from_elf_index (abfd, isym->st_shndx);
   1223  1.1.1.2  christos 		  if (s == NULL)
   1224  1.1.1.2  christos 		    s = sec;
   1225  1.1.1.2  christos 
   1226      1.1     skrll 		  vpp = &elf_section_data (s)->local_dynrel;
   1227  1.1.1.3  christos 		  head = (struct elf_dyn_relocs **) vpp;
   1228      1.1     skrll 		}
   1229      1.1     skrll 
   1230      1.1     skrll 	      p = *head;
   1231      1.1     skrll 	      if (p == NULL || p->sec != sec)
   1232      1.1     skrll 		{
   1233  1.1.1.9  christos 		  size_t amt = sizeof *p;
   1234  1.1.1.3  christos 		  p = ((struct elf_dyn_relocs *)
   1235      1.1     skrll 		       bfd_alloc (htab->elf.dynobj, amt));
   1236      1.1     skrll 		  if (p == NULL)
   1237  1.1.1.9  christos 		    return false;
   1238      1.1     skrll 		  p->next = *head;
   1239      1.1     skrll 		  *head = p;
   1240      1.1     skrll 		  p->sec = sec;
   1241      1.1     skrll 		  p->count = 0;
   1242      1.1     skrll 		  p->pc_count = 0;
   1243      1.1     skrll 		}
   1244      1.1     skrll 
   1245      1.1     skrll 	      p->count += 1;
   1246      1.1     skrll 	      if (ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info) == R_390_PC16
   1247  1.1.1.4  christos 		  || ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info) == R_390_PC12DBL
   1248  1.1.1.4  christos 		  || ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info) == R_390_PC16DBL
   1249      1.1     skrll 		  || ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info) == R_390_PC16DBL
   1250      1.1     skrll 		  || ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info) == R_390_PC32
   1251      1.1     skrll 		  || ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info) == R_390_PC32DBL
   1252      1.1     skrll 		  || ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info) == R_390_PC64)
   1253      1.1     skrll 		p->pc_count += 1;
   1254      1.1     skrll 	    }
   1255      1.1     skrll 	  break;
   1256      1.1     skrll 
   1257      1.1     skrll 	  /* This relocation describes the C++ object vtable hierarchy.
   1258      1.1     skrll 	     Reconstruct it for later use during GC.  */
   1259      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GNU_VTINHERIT:
   1260      1.1     skrll 	  if (!bfd_elf_gc_record_vtinherit (abfd, sec, h, rel->r_offset))
   1261  1.1.1.9  christos 	    return false;
   1262      1.1     skrll 	  break;
   1263      1.1     skrll 
   1264      1.1     skrll 	  /* This relocation describes which C++ vtable entries are actually
   1265      1.1     skrll 	     used.  Record for later use during GC.  */
   1266      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GNU_VTENTRY:
   1267  1.1.1.8  christos 	  if (!bfd_elf_gc_record_vtentry (abfd, sec, h, rel->r_addend))
   1268  1.1.1.9  christos 	    return false;
   1269      1.1     skrll 	  break;
   1270      1.1     skrll 
   1271      1.1     skrll 	default:
   1272      1.1     skrll 	  break;
   1273      1.1     skrll 	}
   1274      1.1     skrll     }
   1275      1.1     skrll 
   1276  1.1.1.9  christos   return true;
   1277      1.1     skrll }
   1278      1.1     skrll 
   1279      1.1     skrll /* Return the section that should be marked against GC for a given
   1280      1.1     skrll    relocation.  */
   1281      1.1     skrll 
   1282      1.1     skrll static asection *
   1283      1.1     skrll elf_s390_gc_mark_hook (asection *sec,
   1284      1.1     skrll 		       struct bfd_link_info *info,
   1285      1.1     skrll 		       Elf_Internal_Rela *rel,
   1286      1.1     skrll 		       struct elf_link_hash_entry *h,
   1287      1.1     skrll 		       Elf_Internal_Sym *sym)
   1288      1.1     skrll {
   1289      1.1     skrll   if (h != NULL)
   1290      1.1     skrll     switch (ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info))
   1291      1.1     skrll       {
   1292      1.1     skrll       case R_390_GNU_VTINHERIT:
   1293      1.1     skrll       case R_390_GNU_VTENTRY:
   1294      1.1     skrll 	return NULL;
   1295      1.1     skrll       }
   1296      1.1     skrll 
   1297      1.1     skrll   return _bfd_elf_gc_mark_hook (sec, info, rel, h, sym);
   1298      1.1     skrll }
   1299      1.1     skrll 
   1300      1.1     skrll /* Make sure we emit a GOT entry if the symbol was supposed to have a PLT
   1301      1.1     skrll    entry but we found we will not create any.  Called when we find we will
   1302      1.1     skrll    not have any PLT for this symbol, by for example
   1303      1.1     skrll    elf_s390_adjust_dynamic_symbol when we're doing a proper dynamic link,
   1304      1.1     skrll    or elf_s390_size_dynamic_sections if no dynamic sections will be
   1305      1.1     skrll    created (we're only linking static objects).  */
   1306      1.1     skrll 
   1307      1.1     skrll static void
   1308  1.1.1.3  christos elf_s390_adjust_gotplt (struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *h)
   1309      1.1     skrll {
   1310      1.1     skrll   if (h->elf.root.type == bfd_link_hash_warning)
   1311      1.1     skrll     h = (struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *) h->elf.root.u.i.link;
   1312      1.1     skrll 
   1313      1.1     skrll   if (h->gotplt_refcount <= 0)
   1314      1.1     skrll     return;
   1315      1.1     skrll 
   1316      1.1     skrll   /* We simply add the number of gotplt references to the number
   1317      1.1     skrll    * of got references for this symbol.  */
   1318      1.1     skrll   h->elf.got.refcount += h->gotplt_refcount;
   1319      1.1     skrll   h->gotplt_refcount = -1;
   1320      1.1     skrll }
   1321      1.1     skrll 
   1322      1.1     skrll /* Adjust a symbol defined by a dynamic object and referenced by a
   1323      1.1     skrll    regular object.  The current definition is in some section of the
   1324      1.1     skrll    dynamic object, but we're not including those sections.  We have to
   1325      1.1     skrll    change the definition to something the rest of the link can
   1326      1.1     skrll    understand.  */
   1327      1.1     skrll 
   1328  1.1.1.9  christos static bool
   1329  1.1.1.2  christos elf_s390_adjust_dynamic_symbol (struct bfd_link_info *info,
   1330  1.1.1.2  christos 				struct elf_link_hash_entry *h)
   1331      1.1     skrll {
   1332      1.1     skrll   struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *htab;
   1333  1.1.1.6  christos   asection *s, *srel;
   1334      1.1     skrll 
   1335  1.1.1.3  christos   /* STT_GNU_IFUNC symbol must go through PLT. */
   1336  1.1.1.3  christos   if (s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p (h))
   1337  1.1.1.4  christos     {
   1338  1.1.1.4  christos       /* All local STT_GNU_IFUNC references must be treated as local
   1339  1.1.1.4  christos 	 calls via local PLT.  */
   1340  1.1.1.4  christos       if (h->ref_regular && SYMBOL_CALLS_LOCAL (info, h))
   1341  1.1.1.4  christos 	{
   1342  1.1.1.4  christos 	  bfd_size_type pc_count = 0, count = 0;
   1343  1.1.1.4  christos 	  struct elf_dyn_relocs **pp;
   1344  1.1.1.4  christos 	  struct elf_dyn_relocs *p;
   1345  1.1.1.4  christos 
   1346  1.1.1.9  christos 	  for (pp = &h->dyn_relocs; (p = *pp) != NULL; )
   1347  1.1.1.4  christos 	    {
   1348  1.1.1.4  christos 	      pc_count += p->pc_count;
   1349  1.1.1.4  christos 	      p->count -= p->pc_count;
   1350  1.1.1.4  christos 	      p->pc_count = 0;
   1351  1.1.1.4  christos 	      count += p->count;
   1352  1.1.1.4  christos 	      if (p->count == 0)
   1353  1.1.1.4  christos 		*pp = p->next;
   1354  1.1.1.4  christos 	      else
   1355  1.1.1.4  christos 		pp = &p->next;
   1356  1.1.1.4  christos 	    }
   1357  1.1.1.4  christos 
   1358  1.1.1.4  christos 	  if (pc_count || count)
   1359  1.1.1.4  christos 	    {
   1360  1.1.1.4  christos 	      h->needs_plt = 1;
   1361  1.1.1.4  christos 	      h->non_got_ref = 1;
   1362  1.1.1.4  christos 	      if (h->plt.refcount <= 0)
   1363  1.1.1.4  christos 		h->plt.refcount = 1;
   1364  1.1.1.4  christos 	      else
   1365  1.1.1.4  christos 		h->plt.refcount += 1;
   1366  1.1.1.4  christos 	    }
   1367  1.1.1.4  christos 	}
   1368  1.1.1.4  christos 
   1369  1.1.1.4  christos       if (h->plt.refcount <= 0)
   1370  1.1.1.4  christos 	{
   1371  1.1.1.4  christos 	  h->plt.offset = (bfd_vma) -1;
   1372  1.1.1.4  christos 	  h->needs_plt = 0;
   1373  1.1.1.4  christos 	}
   1374  1.1.1.9  christos       return true;
   1375  1.1.1.4  christos     }
   1376  1.1.1.3  christos 
   1377      1.1     skrll   /* If this is a function, put it in the procedure linkage table.  We
   1378      1.1     skrll      will fill in the contents of the procedure linkage table later
   1379      1.1     skrll      (although we could actually do it here).  */
   1380      1.1     skrll   if (h->type == STT_FUNC
   1381      1.1     skrll       || h->needs_plt)
   1382      1.1     skrll     {
   1383      1.1     skrll       if (h->plt.refcount <= 0
   1384  1.1.1.2  christos 	  || SYMBOL_CALLS_LOCAL (info, h)
   1385  1.1.1.6  christos 	  || UNDEFWEAK_NO_DYNAMIC_RELOC (info, h))
   1386      1.1     skrll 	{
   1387      1.1     skrll 	  /* This case can occur if we saw a PLT32 reloc in an input
   1388      1.1     skrll 	     file, but the symbol was never referred to by a dynamic
   1389      1.1     skrll 	     object, or if all references were garbage collected.  In
   1390      1.1     skrll 	     such a case, we don't actually need to build a procedure
   1391      1.1     skrll 	     linkage table, and we can just do a PC32 reloc instead.  */
   1392      1.1     skrll 	  h->plt.offset = (bfd_vma) -1;
   1393      1.1     skrll 	  h->needs_plt = 0;
   1394      1.1     skrll 	  elf_s390_adjust_gotplt((struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *) h);
   1395      1.1     skrll 	}
   1396      1.1     skrll 
   1397  1.1.1.9  christos       return true;
   1398      1.1     skrll     }
   1399      1.1     skrll   else
   1400      1.1     skrll     /* It's possible that we incorrectly decided a .plt reloc was
   1401      1.1     skrll        needed for an R_390_PC32 reloc to a non-function sym in
   1402      1.1     skrll        check_relocs.  We can't decide accurately between function and
   1403      1.1     skrll        non-function syms in check-relocs;  Objects loaded later in
   1404      1.1     skrll        the link may change h->type.  So fix it now.  */
   1405      1.1     skrll     h->plt.offset = (bfd_vma) -1;
   1406      1.1     skrll 
   1407      1.1     skrll   /* If this is a weak symbol, and there is a real definition, the
   1408      1.1     skrll      processor independent code will have arranged for us to see the
   1409      1.1     skrll      real definition first, and we can just use the same value.  */
   1410  1.1.1.6  christos   if (h->is_weakalias)
   1411      1.1     skrll     {
   1412  1.1.1.6  christos       struct elf_link_hash_entry *def = weakdef (h);
   1413  1.1.1.6  christos       BFD_ASSERT (def->root.type == bfd_link_hash_defined);
   1414  1.1.1.6  christos       h->root.u.def.section = def->root.u.def.section;
   1415  1.1.1.6  christos       h->root.u.def.value = def->root.u.def.value;
   1416      1.1     skrll       if (ELIMINATE_COPY_RELOCS || info->nocopyreloc)
   1417  1.1.1.6  christos 	h->non_got_ref = def->non_got_ref;
   1418  1.1.1.9  christos       return true;
   1419      1.1     skrll     }
   1420      1.1     skrll 
   1421      1.1     skrll   /* This is a reference to a symbol defined by a dynamic object which
   1422      1.1     skrll      is not a function.  */
   1423      1.1     skrll 
   1424      1.1     skrll   /* If we are creating a shared library, we must presume that the
   1425      1.1     skrll      only references to the symbol are via the global offset table.
   1426      1.1     skrll      For such cases we need not do anything here; the relocations will
   1427      1.1     skrll      be handled correctly by relocate_section.  */
   1428  1.1.1.4  christos   if (bfd_link_pic (info))
   1429  1.1.1.9  christos     return true;
   1430      1.1     skrll 
   1431      1.1     skrll   /* If there are no references to this symbol that do not use the
   1432      1.1     skrll      GOT, we don't need to generate a copy reloc.  */
   1433      1.1     skrll   if (!h->non_got_ref)
   1434  1.1.1.9  christos     return true;
   1435      1.1     skrll 
   1436      1.1     skrll   /* If -z nocopyreloc was given, we won't generate them either.  */
   1437      1.1     skrll   if (info->nocopyreloc)
   1438      1.1     skrll     {
   1439      1.1     skrll       h->non_got_ref = 0;
   1440  1.1.1.9  christos       return true;
   1441      1.1     skrll     }
   1442      1.1     skrll 
   1443  1.1.1.6  christos   /* If we don't find any dynamic relocs in read-only sections, then
   1444  1.1.1.6  christos      we'll be keeping the dynamic relocs and avoiding the copy reloc.  */
   1445  1.1.1.9  christos   if (ELIMINATE_COPY_RELOCS && !_bfd_elf_readonly_dynrelocs (h))
   1446      1.1     skrll     {
   1447  1.1.1.6  christos       h->non_got_ref = 0;
   1448  1.1.1.9  christos       return true;
   1449      1.1     skrll     }
   1450      1.1     skrll 
   1451      1.1     skrll   /* We must allocate the symbol in our .dynbss section, which will
   1452      1.1     skrll      become part of the .bss section of the executable.  There will be
   1453      1.1     skrll      an entry for this symbol in the .dynsym section.  The dynamic
   1454      1.1     skrll      object will contain position independent code, so all references
   1455      1.1     skrll      from the dynamic object to this symbol will go through the global
   1456      1.1     skrll      offset table.  The dynamic linker will use the .dynsym entry to
   1457      1.1     skrll      determine the address it must put in the global offset table, so
   1458      1.1     skrll      both the dynamic object and the regular object will refer to the
   1459      1.1     skrll      same memory location for the variable.  */
   1460      1.1     skrll 
   1461      1.1     skrll   htab = elf_s390_hash_table (info);
   1462  1.1.1.2  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   1463  1.1.1.9  christos     return false;
   1464      1.1     skrll 
   1465      1.1     skrll   /* We must generate a R_390_COPY reloc to tell the dynamic linker to
   1466      1.1     skrll      copy the initial value out of the dynamic object and into the
   1467      1.1     skrll      runtime process image.  */
   1468  1.1.1.6  christos   if ((h->root.u.def.section->flags & SEC_READONLY) != 0)
   1469  1.1.1.6  christos     {
   1470  1.1.1.6  christos       s = htab->elf.sdynrelro;
   1471  1.1.1.6  christos       srel = htab->elf.sreldynrelro;
   1472  1.1.1.6  christos     }
   1473  1.1.1.6  christos   else
   1474  1.1.1.6  christos     {
   1475  1.1.1.6  christos       s = htab->elf.sdynbss;
   1476  1.1.1.6  christos       srel = htab->elf.srelbss;
   1477  1.1.1.6  christos     }
   1478  1.1.1.3  christos   if ((h->root.u.def.section->flags & SEC_ALLOC) != 0 && h->size != 0)
   1479      1.1     skrll     {
   1480  1.1.1.6  christos       srel->size += sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
   1481      1.1     skrll       h->needs_copy = 1;
   1482      1.1     skrll     }
   1483      1.1     skrll 
   1484  1.1.1.4  christos   return _bfd_elf_adjust_dynamic_copy (info, h, s);
   1485      1.1     skrll }
   1486      1.1     skrll 
   1487      1.1     skrll /* Allocate space in .plt, .got and associated reloc sections for
   1488      1.1     skrll    dynamic relocs.  */
   1489      1.1     skrll 
   1490  1.1.1.9  christos static bool
   1491  1.1.1.2  christos allocate_dynrelocs (struct elf_link_hash_entry *h,
   1492  1.1.1.2  christos 		    void * inf)
   1493      1.1     skrll {
   1494      1.1     skrll   struct bfd_link_info *info;
   1495      1.1     skrll   struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *htab;
   1496  1.1.1.3  christos   struct elf_dyn_relocs *p;
   1497      1.1     skrll 
   1498      1.1     skrll   if (h->root.type == bfd_link_hash_indirect)
   1499  1.1.1.9  christos     return true;
   1500      1.1     skrll 
   1501      1.1     skrll   info = (struct bfd_link_info *) inf;
   1502      1.1     skrll   htab = elf_s390_hash_table (info);
   1503  1.1.1.2  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   1504  1.1.1.9  christos     return false;
   1505      1.1     skrll 
   1506  1.1.1.3  christos   /* Since STT_GNU_IFUNC symbol must go through PLT, we handle it
   1507  1.1.1.3  christos      here if it is defined and referenced in a non-shared object.  */
   1508  1.1.1.3  christos   if (s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p (h) && h->def_regular)
   1509  1.1.1.4  christos     return s390_elf_allocate_ifunc_dyn_relocs (info, h);
   1510  1.1.1.3  christos   else if (htab->elf.dynamic_sections_created
   1511  1.1.1.3  christos 	   && h->plt.refcount > 0)
   1512      1.1     skrll     {
   1513      1.1     skrll       /* Make sure this symbol is output as a dynamic symbol.
   1514      1.1     skrll 	 Undefined weak syms won't yet be marked as dynamic.  */
   1515      1.1     skrll       if (h->dynindx == -1
   1516      1.1     skrll 	  && !h->forced_local)
   1517      1.1     skrll 	{
   1518      1.1     skrll 	  if (! bfd_elf_link_record_dynamic_symbol (info, h))
   1519  1.1.1.9  christos 	    return false;
   1520      1.1     skrll 	}
   1521      1.1     skrll 
   1522  1.1.1.4  christos       if (bfd_link_pic (info)
   1523      1.1     skrll 	  || WILL_CALL_FINISH_DYNAMIC_SYMBOL (1, 0, h))
   1524      1.1     skrll 	{
   1525  1.1.1.3  christos 	  asection *s = htab->elf.splt;
   1526      1.1     skrll 
   1527      1.1     skrll 	  /* If this is the first .plt entry, make room for the special
   1528      1.1     skrll 	     first entry.  */
   1529      1.1     skrll 	  if (s->size == 0)
   1530      1.1     skrll 	    s->size += PLT_FIRST_ENTRY_SIZE;
   1531      1.1     skrll 
   1532      1.1     skrll 	  h->plt.offset = s->size;
   1533      1.1     skrll 
   1534      1.1     skrll 	  /* If this symbol is not defined in a regular file, and we are
   1535      1.1     skrll 	     not generating a shared library, then set the symbol to this
   1536      1.1     skrll 	     location in the .plt.  This is required to make function
   1537      1.1     skrll 	     pointers compare as equal between the normal executable and
   1538      1.1     skrll 	     the shared library.  */
   1539  1.1.1.4  christos 	  if (! bfd_link_pic (info)
   1540      1.1     skrll 	      && !h->def_regular)
   1541      1.1     skrll 	    {
   1542      1.1     skrll 	      h->root.u.def.section = s;
   1543      1.1     skrll 	      h->root.u.def.value = h->plt.offset;
   1544      1.1     skrll 	    }
   1545      1.1     skrll 
   1546      1.1     skrll 	  /* Make room for this entry.  */
   1547      1.1     skrll 	  s->size += PLT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   1548      1.1     skrll 
   1549  1.1.1.8  christos 	  /* We also need to make an entry in the .got.plt section.  */
   1550  1.1.1.3  christos 	  htab->elf.sgotplt->size += GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   1551      1.1     skrll 
   1552      1.1     skrll 	  /* We also need to make an entry in the .rela.plt section.  */
   1553  1.1.1.3  christos 	  htab->elf.srelplt->size += sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
   1554      1.1     skrll 	}
   1555      1.1     skrll       else
   1556      1.1     skrll 	{
   1557      1.1     skrll 	  h->plt.offset = (bfd_vma) -1;
   1558      1.1     skrll 	  h->needs_plt = 0;
   1559      1.1     skrll 	  elf_s390_adjust_gotplt((struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *) h);
   1560      1.1     skrll 	}
   1561      1.1     skrll     }
   1562      1.1     skrll   else
   1563      1.1     skrll     {
   1564      1.1     skrll       h->plt.offset = (bfd_vma) -1;
   1565      1.1     skrll       h->needs_plt = 0;
   1566      1.1     skrll       elf_s390_adjust_gotplt((struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *) h);
   1567      1.1     skrll     }
   1568      1.1     skrll 
   1569      1.1     skrll   /* If R_390_TLS_{IE64,GOTIE64,GOTIE12,IEENT} symbol is now local to
   1570      1.1     skrll      the binary, we can optimize a bit. IE64 and GOTIE64 get converted
   1571      1.1     skrll      to R_390_TLS_LE64 requiring no TLS entry. For GOTIE12 and IEENT
   1572      1.1     skrll      we can save the dynamic TLS relocation.  */
   1573      1.1     skrll   if (h->got.refcount > 0
   1574  1.1.1.9  christos       && !bfd_link_dll (info)
   1575      1.1     skrll       && h->dynindx == -1
   1576      1.1     skrll       && elf_s390_hash_entry(h)->tls_type >= GOT_TLS_IE)
   1577      1.1     skrll     {
   1578      1.1     skrll       if (elf_s390_hash_entry(h)->tls_type == GOT_TLS_IE_NLT)
   1579      1.1     skrll 	/* For the GOTIE access without a literal pool entry the offset has
   1580      1.1     skrll 	   to be stored somewhere. The immediate value in the instruction
   1581      1.1     skrll 	   is not bit enough so the value is stored in the got.  */
   1582      1.1     skrll 	{
   1583  1.1.1.3  christos 	  h->got.offset = htab->elf.sgot->size;
   1584  1.1.1.3  christos 	  htab->elf.sgot->size += GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   1585      1.1     skrll 	}
   1586      1.1     skrll       else
   1587      1.1     skrll 	h->got.offset = (bfd_vma) -1;
   1588      1.1     skrll     }
   1589      1.1     skrll   else if (h->got.refcount > 0)
   1590      1.1     skrll     {
   1591      1.1     skrll       asection *s;
   1592  1.1.1.9  christos       bool dyn;
   1593      1.1     skrll       int tls_type = elf_s390_hash_entry(h)->tls_type;
   1594      1.1     skrll 
   1595      1.1     skrll       /* Make sure this symbol is output as a dynamic symbol.
   1596      1.1     skrll 	 Undefined weak syms won't yet be marked as dynamic.  */
   1597      1.1     skrll       if (h->dynindx == -1
   1598      1.1     skrll 	  && !h->forced_local)
   1599      1.1     skrll 	{
   1600      1.1     skrll 	  if (! bfd_elf_link_record_dynamic_symbol (info, h))
   1601  1.1.1.9  christos 	    return false;
   1602      1.1     skrll 	}
   1603      1.1     skrll 
   1604  1.1.1.3  christos       s = htab->elf.sgot;
   1605      1.1     skrll       h->got.offset = s->size;
   1606      1.1     skrll       s->size += GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   1607      1.1     skrll       /* R_390_TLS_GD64 needs 2 consecutive GOT slots.  */
   1608      1.1     skrll       if (tls_type == GOT_TLS_GD)
   1609      1.1     skrll 	s->size += GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   1610      1.1     skrll       dyn = htab->elf.dynamic_sections_created;
   1611      1.1     skrll       /* R_390_TLS_IE64 needs one dynamic relocation,
   1612      1.1     skrll 	 R_390_TLS_GD64 needs one if local symbol and two if global.  */
   1613      1.1     skrll       if ((tls_type == GOT_TLS_GD && h->dynindx == -1)
   1614      1.1     skrll 	  || tls_type >= GOT_TLS_IE)
   1615  1.1.1.3  christos 	htab->elf.srelgot->size += sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
   1616      1.1     skrll       else if (tls_type == GOT_TLS_GD)
   1617  1.1.1.3  christos 	htab->elf.srelgot->size += 2 * sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
   1618  1.1.1.6  christos       else if (!UNDEFWEAK_NO_DYNAMIC_RELOC (info, h)
   1619  1.1.1.4  christos 	       && (bfd_link_pic (info)
   1620      1.1     skrll 		   || WILL_CALL_FINISH_DYNAMIC_SYMBOL (dyn, 0, h)))
   1621  1.1.1.3  christos 	htab->elf.srelgot->size += sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
   1622      1.1     skrll     }
   1623      1.1     skrll   else
   1624      1.1     skrll     h->got.offset = (bfd_vma) -1;
   1625      1.1     skrll 
   1626  1.1.1.9  christos   if (h->dyn_relocs == NULL)
   1627  1.1.1.9  christos     return true;
   1628      1.1     skrll 
   1629      1.1     skrll   /* In the shared -Bsymbolic case, discard space allocated for
   1630      1.1     skrll      dynamic pc-relative relocs against symbols which turn out to be
   1631      1.1     skrll      defined in regular objects.  For the normal shared case, discard
   1632      1.1     skrll      space for pc-relative relocs that have become local due to symbol
   1633      1.1     skrll      visibility changes.  */
   1634      1.1     skrll 
   1635  1.1.1.4  christos   if (bfd_link_pic (info))
   1636      1.1     skrll     {
   1637  1.1.1.2  christos       if (SYMBOL_CALLS_LOCAL (info, h))
   1638      1.1     skrll 	{
   1639  1.1.1.3  christos 	  struct elf_dyn_relocs **pp;
   1640      1.1     skrll 
   1641  1.1.1.9  christos 	  for (pp = &h->dyn_relocs; (p = *pp) != NULL; )
   1642      1.1     skrll 	    {
   1643      1.1     skrll 	      p->count -= p->pc_count;
   1644      1.1     skrll 	      p->pc_count = 0;
   1645      1.1     skrll 	      if (p->count == 0)
   1646      1.1     skrll 		*pp = p->next;
   1647      1.1     skrll 	      else
   1648      1.1     skrll 		pp = &p->next;
   1649      1.1     skrll 	    }
   1650      1.1     skrll 	}
   1651      1.1     skrll 
   1652      1.1     skrll       /* Also discard relocs on undefined weak syms with non-default
   1653      1.1     skrll 	 visibility.  */
   1654  1.1.1.9  christos       if (h->dyn_relocs != NULL
   1655      1.1     skrll 	  && h->root.type == bfd_link_hash_undefweak)
   1656      1.1     skrll 	{
   1657  1.1.1.6  christos 	  if (ELF_ST_VISIBILITY (h->other) != STV_DEFAULT
   1658  1.1.1.6  christos 	      || UNDEFWEAK_NO_DYNAMIC_RELOC (info, h))
   1659  1.1.1.9  christos 	    h->dyn_relocs = NULL;
   1660      1.1     skrll 
   1661      1.1     skrll 	  /* Make sure undefined weak symbols are output as a dynamic
   1662      1.1     skrll 	     symbol in PIEs.  */
   1663      1.1     skrll 	  else if (h->dynindx == -1
   1664      1.1     skrll 		   && !h->forced_local)
   1665      1.1     skrll 	    {
   1666      1.1     skrll 	      if (! bfd_elf_link_record_dynamic_symbol (info, h))
   1667  1.1.1.9  christos 		return false;
   1668      1.1     skrll 	    }
   1669      1.1     skrll 	}
   1670      1.1     skrll     }
   1671      1.1     skrll   else if (ELIMINATE_COPY_RELOCS)
   1672      1.1     skrll     {
   1673      1.1     skrll       /* For the non-shared case, discard space for relocs against
   1674      1.1     skrll 	 symbols which turn out to need copy relocs or are not
   1675      1.1     skrll 	 dynamic.  */
   1676      1.1     skrll 
   1677      1.1     skrll       if (!h->non_got_ref
   1678      1.1     skrll 	  && ((h->def_dynamic
   1679      1.1     skrll 	       && !h->def_regular)
   1680      1.1     skrll 	      || (htab->elf.dynamic_sections_created
   1681      1.1     skrll 		  && (h->root.type == bfd_link_hash_undefweak
   1682      1.1     skrll 		      || h->root.type == bfd_link_hash_undefined))))
   1683      1.1     skrll 	{
   1684      1.1     skrll 	  /* Make sure this symbol is output as a dynamic symbol.
   1685      1.1     skrll 	     Undefined weak syms won't yet be marked as dynamic.  */
   1686      1.1     skrll 	  if (h->dynindx == -1
   1687      1.1     skrll 	      && !h->forced_local)
   1688      1.1     skrll 	    {
   1689      1.1     skrll 	      if (! bfd_elf_link_record_dynamic_symbol (info, h))
   1690  1.1.1.9  christos 		return false;
   1691      1.1     skrll 	    }
   1692      1.1     skrll 
   1693      1.1     skrll 	  /* If that succeeded, we know we'll be keeping all the
   1694      1.1     skrll 	     relocs.  */
   1695      1.1     skrll 	  if (h->dynindx != -1)
   1696      1.1     skrll 	    goto keep;
   1697      1.1     skrll 	}
   1698      1.1     skrll 
   1699  1.1.1.9  christos       h->dyn_relocs = NULL;
   1700      1.1     skrll 
   1701      1.1     skrll     keep: ;
   1702      1.1     skrll     }
   1703      1.1     skrll 
   1704      1.1     skrll   /* Finally, allocate space.  */
   1705  1.1.1.9  christos   for (p = h->dyn_relocs; p != NULL; p = p->next)
   1706      1.1     skrll     {
   1707      1.1     skrll       asection *sreloc = elf_section_data (p->sec)->sreloc;
   1708      1.1     skrll       sreloc->size += p->count * sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
   1709      1.1     skrll     }
   1710      1.1     skrll 
   1711  1.1.1.9  christos   return true;
   1712      1.1     skrll }
   1713      1.1     skrll 
   1714      1.1     skrll /* Set the sizes of the dynamic sections.  */
   1715      1.1     skrll 
   1716  1.1.1.9  christos static bool
   1717  1.1.1.2  christos elf_s390_size_dynamic_sections (bfd *output_bfd ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
   1718  1.1.1.2  christos 				struct bfd_link_info *info)
   1719      1.1     skrll {
   1720      1.1     skrll   struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *htab;
   1721      1.1     skrll   bfd *dynobj;
   1722      1.1     skrll   asection *s;
   1723  1.1.1.9  christos   bool relocs;
   1724      1.1     skrll   bfd *ibfd;
   1725      1.1     skrll 
   1726      1.1     skrll   htab = elf_s390_hash_table (info);
   1727  1.1.1.2  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   1728  1.1.1.9  christos     return false;
   1729  1.1.1.2  christos 
   1730      1.1     skrll   dynobj = htab->elf.dynobj;
   1731      1.1     skrll   if (dynobj == NULL)
   1732      1.1     skrll     abort ();
   1733      1.1     skrll 
   1734      1.1     skrll   if (htab->elf.dynamic_sections_created)
   1735      1.1     skrll     {
   1736      1.1     skrll       /* Set the contents of the .interp section to the interpreter.  */
   1737  1.1.1.4  christos       if (bfd_link_executable (info) && !info->nointerp)
   1738      1.1     skrll 	{
   1739  1.1.1.3  christos 	  s = bfd_get_linker_section (dynobj, ".interp");
   1740      1.1     skrll 	  if (s == NULL)
   1741      1.1     skrll 	    abort ();
   1742      1.1     skrll 	  s->size = sizeof ELF_DYNAMIC_INTERPRETER;
   1743      1.1     skrll 	  s->contents = (unsigned char *) ELF_DYNAMIC_INTERPRETER;
   1744      1.1     skrll 	}
   1745      1.1     skrll     }
   1746      1.1     skrll 
   1747  1.1.1.8  christos   if (htab->elf.sgot && s390_gotplt_after_got_p (info))
   1748  1.1.1.8  christos     {
   1749  1.1.1.8  christos       /* _bfd_elf_create_got_section adds the got header size always
   1750  1.1.1.8  christos 	 to .got.plt but we need it in .got if this section comes
   1751  1.1.1.8  christos 	 first.  */
   1752  1.1.1.8  christos       htab->elf.sgot->size += 3 * GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   1753  1.1.1.8  christos       htab->elf.sgotplt->size -= 3 * GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   1754  1.1.1.8  christos 
   1755  1.1.1.8  christos       /* Make the _GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_ symbol point to the .got
   1756  1.1.1.8  christos 	 instead of .got.plt.  */
   1757  1.1.1.8  christos       htab->elf.hgot->root.u.def.section = htab->elf.sgot;
   1758  1.1.1.8  christos       htab->elf.hgot->root.u.def.value = 0;
   1759  1.1.1.8  christos     }
   1760  1.1.1.8  christos 
   1761      1.1     skrll   /* Set up .got offsets for local syms, and space for local dynamic
   1762      1.1     skrll      relocs.  */
   1763  1.1.1.4  christos   for (ibfd = info->input_bfds; ibfd != NULL; ibfd = ibfd->link.next)
   1764      1.1     skrll     {
   1765      1.1     skrll       bfd_signed_vma *local_got;
   1766      1.1     skrll       bfd_signed_vma *end_local_got;
   1767      1.1     skrll       char *local_tls_type;
   1768      1.1     skrll       bfd_size_type locsymcount;
   1769      1.1     skrll       Elf_Internal_Shdr *symtab_hdr;
   1770      1.1     skrll       asection *srela;
   1771  1.1.1.3  christos       struct plt_entry *local_plt;
   1772  1.1.1.3  christos       unsigned int i;
   1773      1.1     skrll 
   1774      1.1     skrll       if (! is_s390_elf (ibfd))
   1775      1.1     skrll 	continue;
   1776      1.1     skrll 
   1777      1.1     skrll       for (s = ibfd->sections; s != NULL; s = s->next)
   1778      1.1     skrll 	{
   1779  1.1.1.3  christos 	  struct elf_dyn_relocs *p;
   1780      1.1     skrll 
   1781      1.1     skrll 	  for (p = elf_section_data (s)->local_dynrel; p != NULL; p = p->next)
   1782      1.1     skrll 	    {
   1783      1.1     skrll 	      if (!bfd_is_abs_section (p->sec)
   1784      1.1     skrll 		  && bfd_is_abs_section (p->sec->output_section))
   1785      1.1     skrll 		{
   1786      1.1     skrll 		  /* Input section has been discarded, either because
   1787      1.1     skrll 		     it is a copy of a linkonce section or due to
   1788      1.1     skrll 		     linker script /DISCARD/, so we'll be discarding
   1789      1.1     skrll 		     the relocs too.  */
   1790      1.1     skrll 		}
   1791      1.1     skrll 	      else if (p->count != 0)
   1792      1.1     skrll 		{
   1793      1.1     skrll 		  srela = elf_section_data (p->sec)->sreloc;
   1794      1.1     skrll 		  srela->size += p->count * sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
   1795      1.1     skrll 		  if ((p->sec->output_section->flags & SEC_READONLY) != 0)
   1796      1.1     skrll 		    info->flags |= DF_TEXTREL;
   1797      1.1     skrll 		}
   1798      1.1     skrll 	    }
   1799      1.1     skrll 	}
   1800      1.1     skrll 
   1801      1.1     skrll       local_got = elf_local_got_refcounts (ibfd);
   1802      1.1     skrll       if (!local_got)
   1803      1.1     skrll 	continue;
   1804      1.1     skrll 
   1805      1.1     skrll       symtab_hdr = &elf_symtab_hdr (ibfd);
   1806      1.1     skrll       locsymcount = symtab_hdr->sh_info;
   1807      1.1     skrll       end_local_got = local_got + locsymcount;
   1808      1.1     skrll       local_tls_type = elf_s390_local_got_tls_type (ibfd);
   1809  1.1.1.3  christos       s = htab->elf.sgot;
   1810  1.1.1.3  christos       srela = htab->elf.srelgot;
   1811      1.1     skrll       for (; local_got < end_local_got; ++local_got, ++local_tls_type)
   1812      1.1     skrll 	{
   1813      1.1     skrll 	  if (*local_got > 0)
   1814      1.1     skrll 	    {
   1815      1.1     skrll 	      *local_got = s->size;
   1816      1.1     skrll 	      s->size += GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   1817      1.1     skrll 	      if (*local_tls_type == GOT_TLS_GD)
   1818      1.1     skrll 		s->size += GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   1819  1.1.1.4  christos 	      if (bfd_link_pic (info))
   1820      1.1     skrll 		srela->size += sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
   1821      1.1     skrll 	    }
   1822      1.1     skrll 	  else
   1823      1.1     skrll 	    *local_got = (bfd_vma) -1;
   1824      1.1     skrll 	}
   1825  1.1.1.3  christos 
   1826  1.1.1.3  christos       local_plt = elf_s390_local_plt (ibfd);
   1827  1.1.1.3  christos       for (i = 0; i < symtab_hdr->sh_info; i++)
   1828  1.1.1.3  christos 	{
   1829  1.1.1.3  christos 	  if (local_plt[i].plt.refcount > 0)
   1830  1.1.1.3  christos 	    {
   1831  1.1.1.3  christos 	      local_plt[i].plt.offset = htab->elf.iplt->size;
   1832  1.1.1.3  christos 	      htab->elf.iplt->size += PLT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   1833  1.1.1.3  christos 	      htab->elf.igotplt->size += GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   1834  1.1.1.3  christos 	      htab->elf.irelplt->size += sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
   1835  1.1.1.3  christos 	    }
   1836  1.1.1.3  christos 	  else
   1837  1.1.1.3  christos 	    local_plt[i].plt.offset = (bfd_vma) -1;
   1838  1.1.1.3  christos 	}
   1839      1.1     skrll     }
   1840      1.1     skrll 
   1841      1.1     skrll   if (htab->tls_ldm_got.refcount > 0)
   1842      1.1     skrll     {
   1843      1.1     skrll       /* Allocate 2 got entries and 1 dynamic reloc for R_390_TLS_LDM64
   1844      1.1     skrll 	 relocs.  */
   1845  1.1.1.3  christos       htab->tls_ldm_got.offset = htab->elf.sgot->size;
   1846  1.1.1.3  christos       htab->elf.sgot->size += 2 * GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   1847  1.1.1.3  christos       htab->elf.srelgot->size += sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
   1848      1.1     skrll     }
   1849      1.1     skrll   else
   1850      1.1     skrll     htab->tls_ldm_got.offset = -1;
   1851      1.1     skrll 
   1852      1.1     skrll   /* Allocate global sym .plt and .got entries, and space for global
   1853      1.1     skrll      sym dynamic relocs.  */
   1854  1.1.1.3  christos   elf_link_hash_traverse (&htab->elf, allocate_dynrelocs, info);
   1855      1.1     skrll 
   1856      1.1     skrll   /* We now have determined the sizes of the various dynamic sections.
   1857      1.1     skrll      Allocate memory for them.  */
   1858  1.1.1.9  christos   relocs = false;
   1859      1.1     skrll   for (s = dynobj->sections; s != NULL; s = s->next)
   1860      1.1     skrll     {
   1861      1.1     skrll       if ((s->flags & SEC_LINKER_CREATED) == 0)
   1862      1.1     skrll 	continue;
   1863      1.1     skrll 
   1864  1.1.1.3  christos       if (s == htab->elf.splt
   1865  1.1.1.3  christos 	  || s == htab->elf.sgot
   1866  1.1.1.3  christos 	  || s == htab->elf.sgotplt
   1867  1.1.1.6  christos 	  || s == htab->elf.sdynbss
   1868  1.1.1.6  christos 	  || s == htab->elf.sdynrelro
   1869  1.1.1.3  christos 	  || s == htab->elf.iplt
   1870  1.1.1.3  christos 	  || s == htab->elf.igotplt
   1871  1.1.1.3  christos 	  || s == htab->irelifunc)
   1872      1.1     skrll 	{
   1873      1.1     skrll 	  /* Strip this section if we don't need it; see the
   1874      1.1     skrll 	     comment below.  */
   1875      1.1     skrll 	}
   1876  1.1.1.9  christos       else if (startswith (bfd_section_name (s), ".rela"))
   1877      1.1     skrll 	{
   1878  1.1.1.3  christos 	  if (s->size != 0 && s != htab->elf.srelplt)
   1879  1.1.1.9  christos 	    {
   1880  1.1.1.9  christos 	      relocs = true;
   1881  1.1.1.9  christos 	      if (s == htab->elf.irelplt)
   1882  1.1.1.9  christos 		{
   1883  1.1.1.9  christos 		  /* In static-pie case, there are IRELATIVE-relocs in
   1884  1.1.1.9  christos 		     .rela.iplt (htab->irelplt), which will later be grouped
   1885  1.1.1.9  christos 		     to .rela.plt.  On s390, the IRELATIVE relocations are
   1886  1.1.1.9  christos 		     always located in .rela.iplt - even for non-static case.
   1887  1.1.1.9  christos 		     Ensure that DT_JMPREL, DT_PLTRELA, DT_PLTRELASZ is added
   1888  1.1.1.9  christos 		     to the dynamic section even if htab->srelplt->size == 0.
   1889  1.1.1.9  christos 		     See _bfd_elf_add_dynamic_tags in bfd/elflink.c.  */
   1890  1.1.1.9  christos 		  htab->elf.dt_jmprel_required = true;
   1891  1.1.1.9  christos 		}
   1892  1.1.1.9  christos 	    }
   1893      1.1     skrll 
   1894      1.1     skrll 	  /* We use the reloc_count field as a counter if we need
   1895      1.1     skrll 	     to copy relocs into the output file.  */
   1896      1.1     skrll 	  s->reloc_count = 0;
   1897      1.1     skrll 	}
   1898      1.1     skrll       else
   1899      1.1     skrll 	{
   1900      1.1     skrll 	  /* It's not one of our sections, so don't allocate space.  */
   1901      1.1     skrll 	  continue;
   1902      1.1     skrll 	}
   1903      1.1     skrll 
   1904      1.1     skrll       if (s->size == 0)
   1905      1.1     skrll 	{
   1906      1.1     skrll 	  /* If we don't need this section, strip it from the
   1907      1.1     skrll 	     output file.  This is to handle .rela.bss and
   1908      1.1     skrll 	     .rela.plt.  We must create it in
   1909      1.1     skrll 	     create_dynamic_sections, because it must be created
   1910      1.1     skrll 	     before the linker maps input sections to output
   1911      1.1     skrll 	     sections.  The linker does that before
   1912      1.1     skrll 	     adjust_dynamic_symbol is called, and it is that
   1913      1.1     skrll 	     function which decides whether anything needs to go
   1914      1.1     skrll 	     into these sections.  */
   1915      1.1     skrll 
   1916      1.1     skrll 	  s->flags |= SEC_EXCLUDE;
   1917      1.1     skrll 	  continue;
   1918      1.1     skrll 	}
   1919      1.1     skrll 
   1920      1.1     skrll       if ((s->flags & SEC_HAS_CONTENTS) == 0)
   1921      1.1     skrll 	continue;
   1922      1.1     skrll 
   1923      1.1     skrll       /* Allocate memory for the section contents.  We use bfd_zalloc
   1924      1.1     skrll 	 here in case unused entries are not reclaimed before the
   1925      1.1     skrll 	 section's contents are written out.  This should not happen,
   1926      1.1     skrll 	 but this way if it does, we get a R_390_NONE reloc instead
   1927      1.1     skrll 	 of garbage.  */
   1928      1.1     skrll       s->contents = (bfd_byte *) bfd_zalloc (dynobj, s->size);
   1929      1.1     skrll       if (s->contents == NULL)
   1930  1.1.1.9  christos 	return false;
   1931      1.1     skrll     }
   1932      1.1     skrll 
   1933  1.1.1.9  christos   return _bfd_elf_add_dynamic_tags (output_bfd, info, relocs);
   1934      1.1     skrll }
   1935      1.1     skrll 
   1936      1.1     skrll /* Return the base VMA address which should be subtracted from real addresses
   1937      1.1     skrll    when resolving @dtpoff relocation.
   1938      1.1     skrll    This is PT_TLS segment p_vaddr.  */
   1939      1.1     skrll 
   1940      1.1     skrll static bfd_vma
   1941  1.1.1.3  christos dtpoff_base (struct bfd_link_info *info)
   1942      1.1     skrll {
   1943      1.1     skrll   /* If tls_sec is NULL, we should have signalled an error already.  */
   1944      1.1     skrll   if (elf_hash_table (info)->tls_sec == NULL)
   1945      1.1     skrll     return 0;
   1946      1.1     skrll   return elf_hash_table (info)->tls_sec->vma;
   1947      1.1     skrll }
   1948      1.1     skrll 
   1949      1.1     skrll /* Return the relocation value for @tpoff relocation
   1950      1.1     skrll    if STT_TLS virtual address is ADDRESS.  */
   1951      1.1     skrll 
   1952      1.1     skrll static bfd_vma
   1953  1.1.1.3  christos tpoff (struct bfd_link_info *info, bfd_vma address)
   1954      1.1     skrll {
   1955      1.1     skrll   struct elf_link_hash_table *htab = elf_hash_table (info);
   1956      1.1     skrll 
   1957      1.1     skrll   /* If tls_sec is NULL, we should have signalled an error already.  */
   1958      1.1     skrll   if (htab->tls_sec == NULL)
   1959      1.1     skrll     return 0;
   1960      1.1     skrll   return htab->tls_size + htab->tls_sec->vma - address;
   1961      1.1     skrll }
   1962      1.1     skrll 
   1963      1.1     skrll /* Complain if TLS instruction relocation is against an invalid
   1964      1.1     skrll    instruction.  */
   1965      1.1     skrll 
   1966      1.1     skrll static void
   1967  1.1.1.3  christos invalid_tls_insn (bfd *input_bfd,
   1968  1.1.1.3  christos 		  asection *input_section,
   1969  1.1.1.3  christos 		  Elf_Internal_Rela *rel)
   1970      1.1     skrll {
   1971      1.1     skrll   reloc_howto_type *howto;
   1972      1.1     skrll 
   1973      1.1     skrll   howto = elf_howto_table + ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info);
   1974  1.1.1.6  christos   _bfd_error_handler
   1975  1.1.1.6  christos     /* xgettext:c-format */
   1976  1.1.1.7  christos     (_("%pB(%pA+%#" PRIx64 "): invalid instruction for TLS relocation %s"),
   1977      1.1     skrll      input_bfd,
   1978      1.1     skrll      input_section,
   1979  1.1.1.7  christos      (uint64_t) rel->r_offset,
   1980      1.1     skrll      howto->name);
   1981      1.1     skrll   bfd_set_error (bfd_error_bad_value);
   1982      1.1     skrll }
   1983      1.1     skrll 
   1984      1.1     skrll /* Relocate a 390 ELF section.  */
   1985      1.1     skrll 
   1986  1.1.1.9  christos static int
   1987  1.1.1.2  christos elf_s390_relocate_section (bfd *output_bfd,
   1988  1.1.1.2  christos 			   struct bfd_link_info *info,
   1989  1.1.1.2  christos 			   bfd *input_bfd,
   1990  1.1.1.2  christos 			   asection *input_section,
   1991  1.1.1.2  christos 			   bfd_byte *contents,
   1992  1.1.1.2  christos 			   Elf_Internal_Rela *relocs,
   1993  1.1.1.2  christos 			   Elf_Internal_Sym *local_syms,
   1994  1.1.1.2  christos 			   asection **local_sections)
   1995      1.1     skrll {
   1996      1.1     skrll   struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *htab;
   1997      1.1     skrll   Elf_Internal_Shdr *symtab_hdr;
   1998      1.1     skrll   struct elf_link_hash_entry **sym_hashes;
   1999      1.1     skrll   bfd_vma *local_got_offsets;
   2000      1.1     skrll   Elf_Internal_Rela *rel;
   2001      1.1     skrll   Elf_Internal_Rela *relend;
   2002      1.1     skrll 
   2003  1.1.1.8  christos   if (!is_s390_elf (input_bfd))
   2004  1.1.1.8  christos     {
   2005  1.1.1.8  christos       bfd_set_error (bfd_error_wrong_format);
   2006  1.1.1.9  christos       return false;
   2007  1.1.1.8  christos     }
   2008      1.1     skrll 
   2009      1.1     skrll   htab = elf_s390_hash_table (info);
   2010  1.1.1.2  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   2011  1.1.1.9  christos     return false;
   2012  1.1.1.2  christos 
   2013      1.1     skrll   symtab_hdr = &elf_symtab_hdr (input_bfd);
   2014      1.1     skrll   sym_hashes = elf_sym_hashes (input_bfd);
   2015      1.1     skrll   local_got_offsets = elf_local_got_offsets (input_bfd);
   2016      1.1     skrll 
   2017      1.1     skrll   rel = relocs;
   2018      1.1     skrll   relend = relocs + input_section->reloc_count;
   2019      1.1     skrll   for (; rel < relend; rel++)
   2020      1.1     skrll     {
   2021      1.1     skrll       unsigned int r_type;
   2022      1.1     skrll       reloc_howto_type *howto;
   2023      1.1     skrll       unsigned long r_symndx;
   2024      1.1     skrll       struct elf_link_hash_entry *h;
   2025      1.1     skrll       Elf_Internal_Sym *sym;
   2026      1.1     skrll       asection *sec;
   2027      1.1     skrll       bfd_vma off;
   2028      1.1     skrll       bfd_vma relocation;
   2029  1.1.1.9  christos       bool unresolved_reloc;
   2030      1.1     skrll       bfd_reloc_status_type r;
   2031      1.1     skrll       int tls_type;
   2032  1.1.1.9  christos       bool resolved_to_zero;
   2033      1.1     skrll 
   2034      1.1     skrll       r_type = ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info);
   2035      1.1     skrll       if (r_type == (int) R_390_GNU_VTINHERIT
   2036      1.1     skrll 	  || r_type == (int) R_390_GNU_VTENTRY)
   2037      1.1     skrll 	continue;
   2038      1.1     skrll       if (r_type >= (int) R_390_max)
   2039      1.1     skrll 	{
   2040      1.1     skrll 	  bfd_set_error (bfd_error_bad_value);
   2041  1.1.1.9  christos 	  return false;
   2042      1.1     skrll 	}
   2043      1.1     skrll 
   2044      1.1     skrll       howto = elf_howto_table + r_type;
   2045      1.1     skrll       r_symndx = ELF64_R_SYM (rel->r_info);
   2046      1.1     skrll 
   2047      1.1     skrll       h = NULL;
   2048      1.1     skrll       sym = NULL;
   2049      1.1     skrll       sec = NULL;
   2050  1.1.1.9  christos       unresolved_reloc = false;
   2051      1.1     skrll       if (r_symndx < symtab_hdr->sh_info)
   2052      1.1     skrll 	{
   2053      1.1     skrll 	  sym = local_syms + r_symndx;
   2054      1.1     skrll 	  sec = local_sections[r_symndx];
   2055  1.1.1.3  christos 
   2056  1.1.1.3  christos 	  if (ELF_ST_TYPE (sym->st_info) == STT_GNU_IFUNC)
   2057  1.1.1.3  christos 	    {
   2058  1.1.1.3  christos 	      struct plt_entry *local_plt = elf_s390_local_plt (input_bfd);
   2059  1.1.1.3  christos 	      if (local_plt == NULL)
   2060  1.1.1.9  christos 		return false;
   2061  1.1.1.3  christos 
   2062  1.1.1.3  christos 	      /* Address of the PLT slot.  */
   2063  1.1.1.3  christos 	      relocation = (htab->elf.iplt->output_section->vma
   2064  1.1.1.3  christos 			    + htab->elf.iplt->output_offset
   2065  1.1.1.3  christos 			    + local_plt[r_symndx].plt.offset);
   2066  1.1.1.3  christos 
   2067  1.1.1.3  christos 	      switch (r_type)
   2068  1.1.1.3  christos 		{
   2069  1.1.1.4  christos 		case R_390_PLTOFF16:
   2070  1.1.1.4  christos 		case R_390_PLTOFF32:
   2071  1.1.1.4  christos 		case R_390_PLTOFF64:
   2072  1.1.1.8  christos 		  relocation -= s390_got_pointer (info);
   2073  1.1.1.4  christos 		  break;
   2074  1.1.1.3  christos 		case R_390_GOTPLT12:
   2075  1.1.1.3  christos 		case R_390_GOTPLT16:
   2076  1.1.1.3  christos 		case R_390_GOTPLT20:
   2077  1.1.1.3  christos 		case R_390_GOTPLT32:
   2078  1.1.1.3  christos 		case R_390_GOTPLT64:
   2079  1.1.1.3  christos 		case R_390_GOTPLTENT:
   2080  1.1.1.3  christos 		case R_390_GOT12:
   2081  1.1.1.3  christos 		case R_390_GOT16:
   2082  1.1.1.3  christos 		case R_390_GOT20:
   2083  1.1.1.3  christos 		case R_390_GOT32:
   2084  1.1.1.3  christos 		case R_390_GOT64:
   2085  1.1.1.3  christos 		case R_390_GOTENT:
   2086  1.1.1.3  christos 		  {
   2087  1.1.1.3  christos 		    /* Write the PLT slot address into the GOT slot.  */
   2088  1.1.1.3  christos 		    bfd_put_64 (output_bfd, relocation,
   2089  1.1.1.3  christos 				htab->elf.sgot->contents +
   2090  1.1.1.3  christos 				local_got_offsets[r_symndx]);
   2091  1.1.1.3  christos 		    relocation = (local_got_offsets[r_symndx] +
   2092  1.1.1.8  christos 				  s390_got_offset (info));
   2093  1.1.1.3  christos 
   2094  1.1.1.3  christos 		    if (r_type == R_390_GOTENT || r_type == R_390_GOTPLTENT)
   2095  1.1.1.8  christos 		      relocation += s390_got_pointer (info);
   2096  1.1.1.3  christos 		    break;
   2097  1.1.1.3  christos 		  }
   2098  1.1.1.3  christos 		default:
   2099  1.1.1.3  christos 		  break;
   2100  1.1.1.3  christos 		}
   2101  1.1.1.3  christos 	      /* The output section is needed later in
   2102  1.1.1.3  christos 		 finish_dynamic_section when creating the dynamic
   2103  1.1.1.3  christos 		 relocation.  */
   2104  1.1.1.3  christos 	      local_plt[r_symndx].sec = sec;
   2105  1.1.1.3  christos 	      goto do_relocation;
   2106  1.1.1.3  christos 	    }
   2107  1.1.1.3  christos 	  else
   2108  1.1.1.3  christos 	    relocation = _bfd_elf_rela_local_sym (output_bfd, sym, &sec, rel);
   2109      1.1     skrll 	}
   2110      1.1     skrll       else
   2111      1.1     skrll 	{
   2112  1.1.1.9  christos 	  bool warned ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
   2113  1.1.1.9  christos 	  bool ignored ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
   2114      1.1     skrll 
   2115      1.1     skrll 	  RELOC_FOR_GLOBAL_SYMBOL (info, input_bfd, input_section, rel,
   2116      1.1     skrll 				   r_symndx, symtab_hdr, sym_hashes,
   2117      1.1     skrll 				   h, sec, relocation,
   2118  1.1.1.4  christos 				   unresolved_reloc, warned, ignored);
   2119      1.1     skrll 	}
   2120      1.1     skrll 
   2121  1.1.1.3  christos       if (sec != NULL && discarded_section (sec))
   2122  1.1.1.2  christos 	RELOC_AGAINST_DISCARDED_SECTION (info, input_bfd, input_section,
   2123  1.1.1.3  christos 					 rel, 1, relend, howto, 0, contents);
   2124      1.1     skrll 
   2125  1.1.1.4  christos       if (bfd_link_relocatable (info))
   2126      1.1     skrll 	continue;
   2127      1.1     skrll 
   2128  1.1.1.6  christos       resolved_to_zero = (h != NULL
   2129  1.1.1.6  christos 			  && UNDEFWEAK_NO_DYNAMIC_RELOC (info, h));
   2130  1.1.1.6  christos 
   2131      1.1     skrll       switch (r_type)
   2132      1.1     skrll 	{
   2133      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTPLT12:
   2134      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTPLT16:
   2135      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTPLT20:
   2136      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTPLT32:
   2137      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTPLT64:
   2138      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTPLTENT:
   2139      1.1     skrll 	  /* There are three cases for a GOTPLT relocation. 1) The
   2140      1.1     skrll 	     relocation is against the jump slot entry of a plt that
   2141      1.1     skrll 	     will get emitted to the output file. 2) The relocation
   2142      1.1     skrll 	     is against the jump slot of a plt entry that has been
   2143      1.1     skrll 	     removed. elf_s390_adjust_gotplt has created a GOT entry
   2144      1.1     skrll 	     as replacement. 3) The relocation is against a local symbol.
   2145      1.1     skrll 	     Cases 2) and 3) are the same as the GOT relocation code
   2146      1.1     skrll 	     so we just have to test for case 1 and fall through for
   2147      1.1     skrll 	     the other two.  */
   2148      1.1     skrll 	  if (h != NULL && h->plt.offset != (bfd_vma) -1)
   2149      1.1     skrll 	    {
   2150      1.1     skrll 	      bfd_vma plt_index;
   2151      1.1     skrll 
   2152  1.1.1.3  christos 	      if (s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p (h))
   2153  1.1.1.3  christos 		{
   2154  1.1.1.8  christos 		  /* Entry indices of .iplt and .igot.plt match
   2155  1.1.1.8  christos 		     1:1. No magic PLT first entry here.  */
   2156  1.1.1.3  christos 		  plt_index = h->plt.offset / PLT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   2157  1.1.1.8  christos 		  relocation = (plt_index * GOT_ENTRY_SIZE
   2158  1.1.1.8  christos 				+ s390_gotplt_offset (info)
   2159  1.1.1.8  christos 				+ htab->elf.igotplt->output_offset);
   2160  1.1.1.3  christos 		}
   2161  1.1.1.3  christos 	      else
   2162  1.1.1.3  christos 		{
   2163  1.1.1.8  christos 		  plt_index = ((h->plt.offset - PLT_FIRST_ENTRY_SIZE)
   2164  1.1.1.8  christos 			       / PLT_ENTRY_SIZE);
   2165  1.1.1.8  christos 
   2166  1.1.1.8  christos 		  relocation = (plt_index * GOT_ENTRY_SIZE
   2167  1.1.1.8  christos 				+ s390_gotplt_offset (info));
   2168  1.1.1.3  christos 		}
   2169  1.1.1.8  christos 	      if (r_type == R_390_GOTPLTENT)
   2170  1.1.1.8  christos 		relocation += s390_got_pointer (info);
   2171  1.1.1.9  christos 	      unresolved_reloc = false;
   2172      1.1     skrll 	      break;
   2173      1.1     skrll 	    }
   2174      1.1     skrll 	  /* Fall through.  */
   2175      1.1     skrll 
   2176      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOT12:
   2177      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOT16:
   2178      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOT20:
   2179      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOT32:
   2180      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOT64:
   2181      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTENT:
   2182      1.1     skrll 	  /* Relocation is to the entry for this symbol in the global
   2183      1.1     skrll 	     offset table.  */
   2184  1.1.1.8  christos 	  if (htab->elf.sgot == NULL)
   2185      1.1     skrll 	    abort ();
   2186      1.1     skrll 
   2187      1.1     skrll 	  if (h != NULL)
   2188      1.1     skrll 	    {
   2189  1.1.1.9  christos 	      bool dyn;
   2190      1.1     skrll 
   2191      1.1     skrll 	      off = h->got.offset;
   2192      1.1     skrll 	      dyn = htab->elf.dynamic_sections_created;
   2193  1.1.1.3  christos 
   2194  1.1.1.3  christos 	      if (s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p (h))
   2195  1.1.1.3  christos 		{
   2196  1.1.1.3  christos 		  BFD_ASSERT (h->plt.offset != (bfd_vma) -1);
   2197  1.1.1.3  christos 		  if (off == (bfd_vma)-1)
   2198  1.1.1.3  christos 		    {
   2199  1.1.1.3  christos 		      /* No explicit GOT usage so redirect to the
   2200  1.1.1.3  christos 			 got.iplt slot.  */
   2201  1.1.1.8  christos 		      relocation = (s390_gotplt_offset (info)
   2202  1.1.1.8  christos 				    + htab->elf.igotplt->output_offset
   2203  1.1.1.8  christos 				    + (h->plt.offset / PLT_ENTRY_SIZE
   2204  1.1.1.8  christos 				       * GOT_ENTRY_SIZE));
   2205  1.1.1.8  christos 
   2206  1.1.1.8  christos 		      /* For @GOTENT the relocation is against the offset between
   2207  1.1.1.8  christos 			 the instruction and the symbols entry in the GOT and not
   2208  1.1.1.8  christos 			 between the start of the GOT and the symbols entry. We
   2209  1.1.1.8  christos 			 add the vma of the GOT to get the correct value.  */
   2210  1.1.1.8  christos 		      if (r_type == R_390_GOTENT || r_type == R_390_GOTPLTENT)
   2211  1.1.1.8  christos 			relocation += s390_got_pointer (info);
   2212  1.1.1.8  christos 
   2213  1.1.1.8  christos 		      break;
   2214  1.1.1.3  christos 		    }
   2215  1.1.1.3  christos 		  else
   2216  1.1.1.3  christos 		    {
   2217  1.1.1.3  christos 		      /* Explicit GOT slots must contain the address
   2218  1.1.1.3  christos 			 of the PLT slot. This will be handled in
   2219  1.1.1.3  christos 			 finish_dynamic_symbol.  */
   2220  1.1.1.3  christos 		    }
   2221  1.1.1.3  christos 		}
   2222  1.1.1.4  christos 	      else if (! WILL_CALL_FINISH_DYNAMIC_SYMBOL (dyn,
   2223  1.1.1.4  christos 							  bfd_link_pic (info),
   2224  1.1.1.4  christos 							  h)
   2225  1.1.1.4  christos 		       || (bfd_link_pic (info)
   2226  1.1.1.3  christos 			   && SYMBOL_REFERENCES_LOCAL (info, h))
   2227  1.1.1.6  christos 		       || resolved_to_zero)
   2228      1.1     skrll 		{
   2229  1.1.1.8  christos 		  Elf_Internal_Sym *isym;
   2230  1.1.1.8  christos 		  asection *sym_sec;
   2231  1.1.1.8  christos 
   2232      1.1     skrll 		  /* This is actually a static link, or it is a
   2233      1.1     skrll 		     -Bsymbolic link and the symbol is defined
   2234      1.1     skrll 		     locally, or the symbol was forced to be local
   2235      1.1     skrll 		     because of a version file.  We must initialize
   2236      1.1     skrll 		     this entry in the global offset table.  Since the
   2237      1.1     skrll 		     offset must always be a multiple of 2, we use the
   2238      1.1     skrll 		     least significant bit to record whether we have
   2239      1.1     skrll 		     initialized it already.
   2240      1.1     skrll 
   2241      1.1     skrll 		     When doing a dynamic link, we create a .rel.got
   2242      1.1     skrll 		     relocation entry to initialize the value.  This
   2243      1.1     skrll 		     is done in the finish_dynamic_symbol routine.  */
   2244      1.1     skrll 		  if ((off & 1) != 0)
   2245      1.1     skrll 		    off &= ~1;
   2246      1.1     skrll 		  else
   2247      1.1     skrll 		    {
   2248      1.1     skrll 		      bfd_put_64 (output_bfd, relocation,
   2249  1.1.1.8  christos 				  htab->elf.sgot->contents + off);
   2250      1.1     skrll 		      h->got.offset |= 1;
   2251      1.1     skrll 		    }
   2252  1.1.1.4  christos 
   2253  1.1.1.8  christos 		  /* When turning a GOT slot dereference into a direct
   2254  1.1.1.8  christos 		     reference using larl we have to make sure that
   2255  1.1.1.8  christos 		     the symbol is 1. properly aligned and 2. it is no
   2256  1.1.1.8  christos 		     ABS symbol or will become one.  */
   2257  1.1.1.4  christos 		  if ((h->def_regular
   2258  1.1.1.4  christos 		       && bfd_link_pic (info)
   2259  1.1.1.4  christos 		       && SYMBOL_REFERENCES_LOCAL (info, h))
   2260  1.1.1.4  christos 		      /* lgrl rx,sym@GOTENT -> larl rx, sym */
   2261  1.1.1.4  christos 		      && ((r_type == R_390_GOTENT
   2262  1.1.1.4  christos 			   && (bfd_get_16 (input_bfd,
   2263  1.1.1.4  christos 					   contents + rel->r_offset - 2)
   2264  1.1.1.4  christos 			       & 0xff0f) == 0xc408)
   2265  1.1.1.4  christos 			  /* lg rx, sym@GOT(r12) -> larl rx, sym */
   2266  1.1.1.4  christos 			  || (r_type == R_390_GOT20
   2267  1.1.1.4  christos 			      && (bfd_get_32 (input_bfd,
   2268  1.1.1.4  christos 					      contents + rel->r_offset - 2)
   2269  1.1.1.4  christos 				  & 0xff00f000) == 0xe300c000
   2270  1.1.1.4  christos 			      && bfd_get_8 (input_bfd,
   2271  1.1.1.8  christos 					    contents + rel->r_offset + 3) == 0x04))
   2272  1.1.1.9  christos 		      && (isym = bfd_sym_from_r_symndx (&htab->elf.sym_cache,
   2273  1.1.1.8  christos 							input_bfd, r_symndx))
   2274  1.1.1.8  christos 		      && isym->st_shndx != SHN_ABS
   2275  1.1.1.8  christos 		      && h != htab->elf.hdynamic
   2276  1.1.1.8  christos 		      && h != htab->elf.hgot
   2277  1.1.1.8  christos 		      && h != htab->elf.hplt
   2278  1.1.1.8  christos 		      && !(isym->st_value & 1)
   2279  1.1.1.8  christos 		      && (sym_sec = bfd_section_from_elf_index (input_bfd,
   2280  1.1.1.8  christos 								isym->st_shndx))
   2281  1.1.1.8  christos 		      && sym_sec->alignment_power)
   2282  1.1.1.4  christos 		    {
   2283  1.1.1.4  christos 		      unsigned short new_insn =
   2284  1.1.1.4  christos 			(0xc000 | (bfd_get_8 (input_bfd,
   2285  1.1.1.4  christos 					      contents + rel->r_offset - 1) & 0xf0));
   2286  1.1.1.4  christos 		      bfd_put_16 (output_bfd, new_insn,
   2287  1.1.1.4  christos 				  contents + rel->r_offset - 2);
   2288  1.1.1.4  christos 		      r_type = R_390_PC32DBL;
   2289  1.1.1.4  christos 		      rel->r_addend = 2;
   2290  1.1.1.4  christos 		      howto = elf_howto_table + r_type;
   2291  1.1.1.4  christos 		      relocation = h->root.u.def.value
   2292  1.1.1.4  christos 			+ h->root.u.def.section->output_section->vma
   2293  1.1.1.4  christos 			+ h->root.u.def.section->output_offset;
   2294  1.1.1.4  christos 		      goto do_relocation;
   2295  1.1.1.4  christos 		    }
   2296      1.1     skrll 		}
   2297      1.1     skrll 	      else
   2298  1.1.1.9  christos 		unresolved_reloc = false;
   2299      1.1     skrll 	    }
   2300      1.1     skrll 	  else
   2301      1.1     skrll 	    {
   2302      1.1     skrll 	      if (local_got_offsets == NULL)
   2303      1.1     skrll 		abort ();
   2304      1.1     skrll 
   2305      1.1     skrll 	      off = local_got_offsets[r_symndx];
   2306      1.1     skrll 
   2307      1.1     skrll 	      /* The offset must always be a multiple of 8.  We use
   2308      1.1     skrll 		 the least significant bit to record whether we have
   2309      1.1     skrll 		 already generated the necessary reloc.  */
   2310      1.1     skrll 	      if ((off & 1) != 0)
   2311      1.1     skrll 		off &= ~1;
   2312      1.1     skrll 	      else
   2313      1.1     skrll 		{
   2314      1.1     skrll 		  bfd_put_64 (output_bfd, relocation,
   2315  1.1.1.3  christos 			      htab->elf.sgot->contents + off);
   2316      1.1     skrll 
   2317  1.1.1.4  christos 		  if (bfd_link_pic (info))
   2318      1.1     skrll 		    {
   2319      1.1     skrll 		      asection *s;
   2320      1.1     skrll 		      Elf_Internal_Rela outrel;
   2321      1.1     skrll 		      bfd_byte *loc;
   2322      1.1     skrll 
   2323  1.1.1.3  christos 		      s = htab->elf.srelgot;
   2324      1.1     skrll 		      if (s == NULL)
   2325      1.1     skrll 			abort ();
   2326      1.1     skrll 
   2327  1.1.1.3  christos 		      outrel.r_offset = (htab->elf.sgot->output_section->vma
   2328  1.1.1.3  christos 					 + htab->elf.sgot->output_offset
   2329      1.1     skrll 					 + off);
   2330      1.1     skrll 		      outrel.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (0, R_390_RELATIVE);
   2331      1.1     skrll 		      outrel.r_addend = relocation;
   2332      1.1     skrll 		      loc = s->contents;
   2333      1.1     skrll 		      loc += s->reloc_count++ * sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
   2334      1.1     skrll 		      bfd_elf64_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &outrel, loc);
   2335      1.1     skrll 		    }
   2336      1.1     skrll 
   2337      1.1     skrll 		  local_got_offsets[r_symndx] |= 1;
   2338      1.1     skrll 		}
   2339      1.1     skrll 	    }
   2340      1.1     skrll 
   2341      1.1     skrll 	  if (off >= (bfd_vma) -2)
   2342      1.1     skrll 	    abort ();
   2343      1.1     skrll 
   2344  1.1.1.8  christos 	  relocation = s390_got_offset (info) + off;
   2345      1.1     skrll 
   2346      1.1     skrll 	  /* For @GOTENT the relocation is against the offset between
   2347      1.1     skrll 	     the instruction and the symbols entry in the GOT and not
   2348      1.1     skrll 	     between the start of the GOT and the symbols entry. We
   2349      1.1     skrll 	     add the vma of the GOT to get the correct value.  */
   2350      1.1     skrll 	  if (   r_type == R_390_GOTENT
   2351      1.1     skrll 	      || r_type == R_390_GOTPLTENT)
   2352  1.1.1.8  christos 	    relocation += s390_got_pointer (info);
   2353      1.1     skrll 
   2354      1.1     skrll 	  break;
   2355      1.1     skrll 
   2356      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTOFF16:
   2357      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTOFF32:
   2358      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTOFF64:
   2359      1.1     skrll 	  /* Relocation is relative to the start of the global offset
   2360      1.1     skrll 	     table.  */
   2361      1.1     skrll 
   2362  1.1.1.4  christos 	  if (h != NULL
   2363  1.1.1.4  christos 	      && s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p (h)
   2364  1.1.1.4  christos 	      && h->def_regular
   2365  1.1.1.4  christos 	      && !bfd_link_executable (info))
   2366  1.1.1.4  christos 	    {
   2367  1.1.1.4  christos 	      relocation = (htab->elf.iplt->output_section->vma
   2368  1.1.1.4  christos 			    + htab->elf.iplt->output_offset
   2369  1.1.1.4  christos 			    + h->plt.offset
   2370  1.1.1.8  christos 			    - s390_got_pointer (info));
   2371  1.1.1.4  christos 	      goto do_relocation;
   2372  1.1.1.4  christos 	    }
   2373  1.1.1.4  christos 
   2374  1.1.1.8  christos 	  relocation -= s390_got_pointer (info);
   2375      1.1     skrll 	  break;
   2376      1.1     skrll 
   2377      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTPC:
   2378      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTPCDBL:
   2379      1.1     skrll 	  /* Use global offset table as symbol value.  */
   2380  1.1.1.8  christos 	  relocation = s390_got_pointer (info);
   2381  1.1.1.9  christos 	  unresolved_reloc = false;
   2382      1.1     skrll 	  break;
   2383      1.1     skrll 
   2384  1.1.1.4  christos 	case R_390_PLT12DBL:
   2385      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PLT16DBL:
   2386  1.1.1.4  christos 	case R_390_PLT24DBL:
   2387      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PLT32:
   2388      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PLT32DBL:
   2389      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PLT64:
   2390      1.1     skrll 	  /* Relocation is to the entry for this symbol in the
   2391      1.1     skrll 	     procedure linkage table.  */
   2392      1.1     skrll 
   2393      1.1     skrll 	  /* Resolve a PLT32 reloc against a local symbol directly,
   2394      1.1     skrll 	     without using the procedure linkage table.  */
   2395      1.1     skrll 	  if (h == NULL)
   2396      1.1     skrll 	    break;
   2397      1.1     skrll 
   2398      1.1     skrll 	  if (h->plt.offset == (bfd_vma) -1
   2399  1.1.1.4  christos 	      || (htab->elf.splt == NULL && !s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p (h)))
   2400      1.1     skrll 	    {
   2401      1.1     skrll 	      /* We didn't make a PLT entry for this symbol.  This
   2402      1.1     skrll 		 happens when statically linking PIC code, or when
   2403      1.1     skrll 		 using -Bsymbolic.  */
   2404      1.1     skrll 	      break;
   2405      1.1     skrll 	    }
   2406  1.1.1.3  christos 	  if (s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p (h))
   2407  1.1.1.3  christos 	    relocation = (htab->elf.iplt->output_section->vma
   2408  1.1.1.3  christos 			  + htab->elf.iplt->output_offset
   2409  1.1.1.3  christos 			  + h->plt.offset);
   2410  1.1.1.3  christos 	  else
   2411  1.1.1.3  christos 	    relocation = (htab->elf.splt->output_section->vma
   2412  1.1.1.3  christos 			  + htab->elf.splt->output_offset
   2413  1.1.1.3  christos 			  + h->plt.offset);
   2414  1.1.1.9  christos 	  unresolved_reloc = false;
   2415      1.1     skrll 	  break;
   2416      1.1     skrll 
   2417      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PLTOFF16:
   2418      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PLTOFF32:
   2419      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PLTOFF64:
   2420      1.1     skrll 	  /* Relocation is to the entry for this symbol in the
   2421      1.1     skrll 	     procedure linkage table relative to the start of the GOT.  */
   2422      1.1     skrll 
   2423      1.1     skrll 	  /* For local symbols or if we didn't make a PLT entry for
   2424      1.1     skrll 	     this symbol resolve the symbol directly.  */
   2425  1.1.1.4  christos 	  if (h == NULL
   2426      1.1     skrll 	      || h->plt.offset == (bfd_vma) -1
   2427  1.1.1.4  christos 	      || (htab->elf.splt == NULL && !s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p (h)))
   2428      1.1     skrll 	    {
   2429  1.1.1.8  christos 	      relocation -= s390_got_pointer (info);
   2430      1.1     skrll 	      break;
   2431      1.1     skrll 	    }
   2432      1.1     skrll 
   2433  1.1.1.3  christos 	  if (s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p (h))
   2434  1.1.1.3  christos 	    relocation = (htab->elf.iplt->output_section->vma
   2435  1.1.1.3  christos 			  + htab->elf.iplt->output_offset
   2436  1.1.1.3  christos 			  + h->plt.offset
   2437  1.1.1.8  christos 			  - s390_got_pointer (info));
   2438  1.1.1.3  christos 	  else
   2439  1.1.1.3  christos 	    relocation = (htab->elf.splt->output_section->vma
   2440  1.1.1.3  christos 			  + htab->elf.splt->output_offset
   2441  1.1.1.3  christos 			  + h->plt.offset
   2442  1.1.1.8  christos 			  - s390_got_pointer (info));
   2443  1.1.1.9  christos 	  unresolved_reloc = false;
   2444      1.1     skrll 	  break;
   2445      1.1     skrll 
   2446      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PC16:
   2447  1.1.1.4  christos 	case R_390_PC12DBL:
   2448      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PC16DBL:
   2449  1.1.1.4  christos 	case R_390_PC24DBL:
   2450      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PC32:
   2451      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PC32DBL:
   2452      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PC64:
   2453  1.1.1.6  christos 	  if (h != NULL
   2454  1.1.1.6  christos 	      && bfd_link_pie (info)
   2455  1.1.1.6  christos 	      && !h->def_regular)
   2456  1.1.1.6  christos 	    {
   2457  1.1.1.7  christos 	      _bfd_error_handler (_("%pB: `%s' non-PLT reloc for symbol defined "
   2458  1.1.1.6  christos 				    "in shared library and accessed "
   2459  1.1.1.6  christos 				    "from executable "
   2460  1.1.1.6  christos 				    "(rebuild file with -fPIC ?)"),
   2461  1.1.1.6  christos 				  input_bfd, h->root.root.string);
   2462  1.1.1.6  christos 	      bfd_set_error (bfd_error_bad_value);
   2463  1.1.1.9  christos 	      return false;
   2464  1.1.1.6  christos 	    }
   2465  1.1.1.4  christos 	  /* The target of these relocs are instruction operands
   2466  1.1.1.4  christos 	     residing in read-only sections.  We cannot emit a runtime
   2467  1.1.1.4  christos 	     reloc for it.  */
   2468  1.1.1.4  christos 	  if (h != NULL
   2469  1.1.1.4  christos 	      && s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p (h)
   2470  1.1.1.4  christos 	      && h->def_regular
   2471  1.1.1.4  christos 	      && bfd_link_pic (info))
   2472  1.1.1.4  christos 	    {
   2473  1.1.1.4  christos 	      relocation = (htab->elf.iplt->output_section->vma
   2474  1.1.1.4  christos 			    + htab->elf.iplt->output_offset
   2475  1.1.1.4  christos 			    + h->plt.offset);
   2476  1.1.1.4  christos 	      goto do_relocation;
   2477  1.1.1.4  christos 	    }
   2478  1.1.1.6  christos 	  /* Fall through.  */
   2479  1.1.1.4  christos 
   2480  1.1.1.4  christos 	case R_390_8:
   2481  1.1.1.4  christos 	case R_390_16:
   2482  1.1.1.4  christos 	case R_390_32:
   2483  1.1.1.4  christos 	case R_390_64:
   2484  1.1.1.3  christos 
   2485  1.1.1.7  christos 	  if ((input_section->flags & SEC_ALLOC) == 0)
   2486  1.1.1.7  christos 	    break;
   2487  1.1.1.7  christos 
   2488  1.1.1.3  christos 	  if (h != NULL
   2489  1.1.1.3  christos 	      && s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p (h)
   2490  1.1.1.3  christos 	      && h->def_regular)
   2491  1.1.1.3  christos 	    {
   2492  1.1.1.6  christos 	      if (!bfd_link_pic (info))
   2493  1.1.1.3  christos 		{
   2494  1.1.1.6  christos 		  /* For a non-shared object the symbol will not
   2495  1.1.1.6  christos 		     change.  Hence we can write the address of the
   2496  1.1.1.6  christos 		     target IPLT slot now.  */
   2497  1.1.1.3  christos 		  relocation = (htab->elf.iplt->output_section->vma
   2498  1.1.1.3  christos 				+ htab->elf.iplt->output_offset
   2499  1.1.1.3  christos 				+ h ->plt.offset);
   2500  1.1.1.3  christos 		  goto do_relocation;
   2501  1.1.1.3  christos 		}
   2502  1.1.1.3  christos 	      else
   2503  1.1.1.3  christos 		{
   2504  1.1.1.3  christos 		  /* For shared objects a runtime relocation is needed.  */
   2505  1.1.1.3  christos 
   2506  1.1.1.3  christos 		  Elf_Internal_Rela outrel;
   2507  1.1.1.3  christos 		  asection *sreloc;
   2508  1.1.1.3  christos 
   2509  1.1.1.3  christos 		  /* Need a dynamic relocation to get the real function
   2510  1.1.1.3  christos 		     address.  */
   2511  1.1.1.3  christos 		  outrel.r_offset = _bfd_elf_section_offset (output_bfd,
   2512  1.1.1.3  christos 							     info,
   2513  1.1.1.3  christos 							     input_section,
   2514  1.1.1.3  christos 							     rel->r_offset);
   2515  1.1.1.3  christos 		  if (outrel.r_offset == (bfd_vma) -1
   2516  1.1.1.3  christos 		      || outrel.r_offset == (bfd_vma) -2)
   2517  1.1.1.3  christos 		    abort ();
   2518  1.1.1.3  christos 
   2519  1.1.1.3  christos 		  outrel.r_offset += (input_section->output_section->vma
   2520  1.1.1.3  christos 				      + input_section->output_offset);
   2521  1.1.1.3  christos 
   2522  1.1.1.3  christos 		  if (h->dynindx == -1
   2523  1.1.1.3  christos 		      || h->forced_local
   2524  1.1.1.4  christos 		      || bfd_link_executable (info))
   2525  1.1.1.3  christos 		    {
   2526  1.1.1.3  christos 		      /* This symbol is resolved locally.  */
   2527  1.1.1.3  christos 		      outrel.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (0, R_390_IRELATIVE);
   2528  1.1.1.3  christos 		      outrel.r_addend = (h->root.u.def.value
   2529  1.1.1.3  christos 					 + h->root.u.def.section->output_section->vma
   2530  1.1.1.3  christos 					 + h->root.u.def.section->output_offset);
   2531  1.1.1.3  christos 		    }
   2532  1.1.1.3  christos 		  else
   2533  1.1.1.3  christos 		    {
   2534  1.1.1.3  christos 		      outrel.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (h->dynindx, r_type);
   2535  1.1.1.3  christos 		      outrel.r_addend = 0;
   2536  1.1.1.3  christos 		    }
   2537  1.1.1.3  christos 
   2538  1.1.1.3  christos 		  sreloc = htab->elf.irelifunc;
   2539  1.1.1.3  christos 		  elf_append_rela (output_bfd, sreloc, &outrel);
   2540  1.1.1.3  christos 
   2541  1.1.1.3  christos 		  /* If this reloc is against an external symbol, we
   2542  1.1.1.3  christos 		     do not want to fiddle with the addend.  Otherwise,
   2543  1.1.1.3  christos 		     we need to include the symbol value so that it
   2544  1.1.1.3  christos 		     becomes an addend for the dynamic reloc.  For an
   2545  1.1.1.3  christos 		     internal symbol, we have updated addend.  */
   2546  1.1.1.3  christos 		  continue;
   2547  1.1.1.3  christos 		}
   2548  1.1.1.3  christos 	    }
   2549  1.1.1.3  christos 
   2550  1.1.1.4  christos 	  if ((bfd_link_pic (info)
   2551      1.1     skrll 	       && (h == NULL
   2552  1.1.1.6  christos 		   || (ELF_ST_VISIBILITY (h->other) == STV_DEFAULT
   2553  1.1.1.6  christos 		       && !resolved_to_zero)
   2554      1.1     skrll 		   || h->root.type != bfd_link_hash_undefweak)
   2555      1.1     skrll 	       && ((r_type != R_390_PC16
   2556  1.1.1.4  christos 		    && r_type != R_390_PC12DBL
   2557      1.1     skrll 		    && r_type != R_390_PC16DBL
   2558  1.1.1.4  christos 		    && r_type != R_390_PC24DBL
   2559      1.1     skrll 		    && r_type != R_390_PC32
   2560      1.1     skrll 		    && r_type != R_390_PC32DBL
   2561      1.1     skrll 		    && r_type != R_390_PC64)
   2562  1.1.1.2  christos 		   || !SYMBOL_CALLS_LOCAL (info, h)))
   2563      1.1     skrll 	      || (ELIMINATE_COPY_RELOCS
   2564  1.1.1.4  christos 		  && !bfd_link_pic (info)
   2565      1.1     skrll 		  && h != NULL
   2566      1.1     skrll 		  && h->dynindx != -1
   2567      1.1     skrll 		  && !h->non_got_ref
   2568      1.1     skrll 		  && ((h->def_dynamic
   2569      1.1     skrll 		       && !h->def_regular)
   2570      1.1     skrll 		      || h->root.type == bfd_link_hash_undefweak
   2571      1.1     skrll 		      || h->root.type == bfd_link_hash_undefined)))
   2572      1.1     skrll 	    {
   2573      1.1     skrll 	      Elf_Internal_Rela outrel;
   2574  1.1.1.9  christos 	      bool skip, relocate;
   2575      1.1     skrll 	      asection *sreloc;
   2576      1.1     skrll 	      bfd_byte *loc;
   2577      1.1     skrll 
   2578      1.1     skrll 	      /* When generating a shared object, these relocations
   2579      1.1     skrll 		 are copied into the output file to be resolved at run
   2580      1.1     skrll 		 time.  */
   2581  1.1.1.9  christos 	      skip = false;
   2582  1.1.1.9  christos 	      relocate = false;
   2583      1.1     skrll 
   2584      1.1     skrll 	      outrel.r_offset =
   2585      1.1     skrll 		_bfd_elf_section_offset (output_bfd, info, input_section,
   2586      1.1     skrll 					 rel->r_offset);
   2587      1.1     skrll 	      if (outrel.r_offset == (bfd_vma) -1)
   2588  1.1.1.9  christos 		skip = true;
   2589      1.1     skrll 	      else if (outrel.r_offset == (bfd_vma) -2)
   2590  1.1.1.9  christos 		skip = true, relocate = true;
   2591      1.1     skrll 
   2592      1.1     skrll 	      outrel.r_offset += (input_section->output_section->vma
   2593      1.1     skrll 				  + input_section->output_offset);
   2594      1.1     skrll 
   2595      1.1     skrll 	      if (skip)
   2596      1.1     skrll 		memset (&outrel, 0, sizeof outrel);
   2597      1.1     skrll 	      else if (h != NULL
   2598      1.1     skrll 		       && h->dynindx != -1
   2599      1.1     skrll 		       && (r_type == R_390_PC16
   2600  1.1.1.4  christos 			   || r_type == R_390_PC12DBL
   2601      1.1     skrll 			   || r_type == R_390_PC16DBL
   2602  1.1.1.4  christos 			   || r_type == R_390_PC24DBL
   2603      1.1     skrll 			   || r_type == R_390_PC32
   2604      1.1     skrll 			   || r_type == R_390_PC32DBL
   2605      1.1     skrll 			   || r_type == R_390_PC64
   2606  1.1.1.4  christos 			   || !bfd_link_pic (info)
   2607  1.1.1.2  christos 			   || !SYMBOLIC_BIND (info, h)
   2608      1.1     skrll 			   || !h->def_regular))
   2609      1.1     skrll 		{
   2610      1.1     skrll 		  outrel.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (h->dynindx, r_type);
   2611      1.1     skrll 		  outrel.r_addend = rel->r_addend;
   2612      1.1     skrll 		}
   2613      1.1     skrll 	      else
   2614      1.1     skrll 		{
   2615      1.1     skrll 		  /* This symbol is local, or marked to become local.  */
   2616      1.1     skrll 		  outrel.r_addend = relocation + rel->r_addend;
   2617      1.1     skrll 		  if (r_type == R_390_64)
   2618      1.1     skrll 		    {
   2619  1.1.1.9  christos 		      relocate = true;
   2620      1.1     skrll 		      outrel.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (0, R_390_RELATIVE);
   2621      1.1     skrll 		    }
   2622      1.1     skrll 		  else
   2623      1.1     skrll 		    {
   2624      1.1     skrll 		      long sindx;
   2625      1.1     skrll 
   2626      1.1     skrll 		      if (bfd_is_abs_section (sec))
   2627      1.1     skrll 			sindx = 0;
   2628      1.1     skrll 		      else if (sec == NULL || sec->owner == NULL)
   2629      1.1     skrll 			{
   2630      1.1     skrll 			  bfd_set_error(bfd_error_bad_value);
   2631  1.1.1.9  christos 			  return false;
   2632      1.1     skrll 			}
   2633      1.1     skrll 		      else
   2634      1.1     skrll 			{
   2635      1.1     skrll 			  asection *osec;
   2636      1.1     skrll 
   2637      1.1     skrll 			  osec = sec->output_section;
   2638      1.1     skrll 			  sindx = elf_section_data (osec)->dynindx;
   2639      1.1     skrll 
   2640      1.1     skrll 			  if (sindx == 0)
   2641      1.1     skrll 			    {
   2642      1.1     skrll 			      osec = htab->elf.text_index_section;
   2643      1.1     skrll 			      sindx = elf_section_data (osec)->dynindx;
   2644      1.1     skrll 			    }
   2645      1.1     skrll 			  BFD_ASSERT (sindx != 0);
   2646      1.1     skrll 
   2647      1.1     skrll 			  /* We are turning this relocation into one
   2648      1.1     skrll 			     against a section symbol, so subtract out
   2649      1.1     skrll 			     the output section's address but not the
   2650      1.1     skrll 			     offset of the input section in the output
   2651      1.1     skrll 			     section.  */
   2652      1.1     skrll 			  outrel.r_addend -= osec->vma;
   2653      1.1     skrll 			}
   2654      1.1     skrll 		      outrel.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (sindx, r_type);
   2655      1.1     skrll 		    }
   2656      1.1     skrll 		}
   2657      1.1     skrll 
   2658      1.1     skrll 	      sreloc = elf_section_data (input_section)->sreloc;
   2659      1.1     skrll 	      if (sreloc == NULL)
   2660      1.1     skrll 		abort ();
   2661      1.1     skrll 
   2662      1.1     skrll 	      loc = sreloc->contents;
   2663      1.1     skrll 	      loc += sreloc->reloc_count++ * sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
   2664      1.1     skrll 	      bfd_elf64_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &outrel, loc);
   2665      1.1     skrll 
   2666      1.1     skrll 	      /* If this reloc is against an external symbol, we do
   2667      1.1     skrll 		 not want to fiddle with the addend.  Otherwise, we
   2668      1.1     skrll 		 need to include the symbol value so that it becomes
   2669      1.1     skrll 		 an addend for the dynamic reloc.  */
   2670      1.1     skrll 	      if (! relocate)
   2671      1.1     skrll 		continue;
   2672      1.1     skrll 	    }
   2673      1.1     skrll 
   2674      1.1     skrll 	  break;
   2675      1.1     skrll 
   2676      1.1     skrll 	  /* Relocations for tls literal pool entries.  */
   2677      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_IE64:
   2678  1.1.1.9  christos 	  if (bfd_link_dll (info))
   2679      1.1     skrll 	    {
   2680      1.1     skrll 	      Elf_Internal_Rela outrel;
   2681      1.1     skrll 	      asection *sreloc;
   2682      1.1     skrll 	      bfd_byte *loc;
   2683      1.1     skrll 
   2684      1.1     skrll 	      outrel.r_offset = rel->r_offset
   2685      1.1     skrll 				+ input_section->output_section->vma
   2686      1.1     skrll 				+ input_section->output_offset;
   2687      1.1     skrll 	      outrel.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (0, R_390_RELATIVE);
   2688      1.1     skrll 	      sreloc = elf_section_data (input_section)->sreloc;
   2689      1.1     skrll 	      if (sreloc == NULL)
   2690      1.1     skrll 		abort ();
   2691      1.1     skrll 	      loc = sreloc->contents;
   2692      1.1     skrll 	      loc += sreloc->reloc_count++ * sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
   2693      1.1     skrll 	      bfd_elf64_swap_reloc_out (output_bfd, &outrel, loc);
   2694      1.1     skrll 	    }
   2695      1.1     skrll 	  /* Fall through.  */
   2696      1.1     skrll 
   2697      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_GD64:
   2698      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_GOTIE64:
   2699      1.1     skrll 	  r_type = elf_s390_tls_transition (info, r_type, h == NULL);
   2700      1.1     skrll 	  tls_type = GOT_UNKNOWN;
   2701      1.1     skrll 	  if (h == NULL && local_got_offsets)
   2702      1.1     skrll 	    tls_type = elf_s390_local_got_tls_type (input_bfd) [r_symndx];
   2703      1.1     skrll 	  else if (h != NULL)
   2704      1.1     skrll 	    {
   2705      1.1     skrll 	      tls_type = elf_s390_hash_entry(h)->tls_type;
   2706  1.1.1.9  christos 	      if (!bfd_link_dll (info) && h->dynindx == -1 && tls_type >= GOT_TLS_IE)
   2707      1.1     skrll 		r_type = R_390_TLS_LE64;
   2708      1.1     skrll 	    }
   2709      1.1     skrll 	  if (r_type == R_390_TLS_GD64 && tls_type >= GOT_TLS_IE)
   2710      1.1     skrll 	    r_type = R_390_TLS_IE64;
   2711      1.1     skrll 
   2712      1.1     skrll 	  if (r_type == R_390_TLS_LE64)
   2713      1.1     skrll 	    {
   2714      1.1     skrll 	      /* This relocation gets optimized away by the local exec
   2715      1.1     skrll 		 access optimization.  */
   2716      1.1     skrll 	      BFD_ASSERT (! unresolved_reloc);
   2717      1.1     skrll 	      bfd_put_64 (output_bfd, -tpoff (info, relocation),
   2718      1.1     skrll 			  contents + rel->r_offset);
   2719      1.1     skrll 	      continue;
   2720      1.1     skrll 	    }
   2721      1.1     skrll 
   2722  1.1.1.3  christos 	  if (htab->elf.sgot == NULL)
   2723      1.1     skrll 	    abort ();
   2724      1.1     skrll 
   2725      1.1     skrll 	  if (h != NULL)
   2726      1.1     skrll 	    off = h->got.offset;
   2727      1.1     skrll 	  else
   2728      1.1     skrll 	    {
   2729      1.1     skrll 	      if (local_got_offsets == NULL)
   2730      1.1     skrll 		abort ();
   2731      1.1     skrll 
   2732      1.1     skrll 	      off = local_got_offsets[r_symndx];
   2733      1.1     skrll 	    }
   2734      1.1     skrll 
   2735      1.1     skrll 	emit_tls_relocs:
   2736      1.1     skrll 
   2737      1.1     skrll 	  if ((off & 1) != 0)
   2738      1.1     skrll 	    off &= ~1;
   2739      1.1     skrll 	  else
   2740      1.1     skrll 	    {
   2741      1.1     skrll 	      Elf_Internal_Rela outrel;
   2742      1.1     skrll 	      bfd_byte *loc;
   2743      1.1     skrll 	      int dr_type, indx;
   2744      1.1     skrll 
   2745  1.1.1.3  christos 	      if (htab->elf.srelgot == NULL)
   2746      1.1     skrll 		abort ();
   2747      1.1     skrll 
   2748  1.1.1.3  christos 	      outrel.r_offset = (htab->elf.sgot->output_section->vma
   2749  1.1.1.3  christos 				 + htab->elf.sgot->output_offset + off);
   2750      1.1     skrll 
   2751      1.1     skrll 	      indx = h && h->dynindx != -1 ? h->dynindx : 0;
   2752      1.1     skrll 	      if (r_type == R_390_TLS_GD64)
   2753      1.1     skrll 		dr_type = R_390_TLS_DTPMOD;
   2754      1.1     skrll 	      else
   2755      1.1     skrll 		dr_type = R_390_TLS_TPOFF;
   2756      1.1     skrll 	      if (dr_type == R_390_TLS_TPOFF && indx == 0)
   2757      1.1     skrll 		outrel.r_addend = relocation - dtpoff_base (info);
   2758      1.1     skrll 	      else
   2759      1.1     skrll 		outrel.r_addend = 0;
   2760      1.1     skrll 	      outrel.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (indx, dr_type);
   2761  1.1.1.3  christos 	      loc = htab->elf.srelgot->contents;
   2762  1.1.1.3  christos 	      loc += htab->elf.srelgot->reloc_count++
   2763      1.1     skrll 		* sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
   2764      1.1     skrll 	      bfd_elf64_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &outrel, loc);
   2765      1.1     skrll 
   2766      1.1     skrll 	      if (r_type == R_390_TLS_GD64)
   2767      1.1     skrll 		{
   2768      1.1     skrll 		  if (indx == 0)
   2769      1.1     skrll 		    {
   2770  1.1.1.6  christos 		      BFD_ASSERT (! unresolved_reloc);
   2771      1.1     skrll 		      bfd_put_64 (output_bfd,
   2772      1.1     skrll 				  relocation - dtpoff_base (info),
   2773  1.1.1.3  christos 				  htab->elf.sgot->contents + off + GOT_ENTRY_SIZE);
   2774      1.1     skrll 		    }
   2775      1.1     skrll 		  else
   2776      1.1     skrll 		    {
   2777      1.1     skrll 		      outrel.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (indx, R_390_TLS_DTPOFF);
   2778      1.1     skrll 		      outrel.r_offset += GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   2779      1.1     skrll 		      outrel.r_addend = 0;
   2780  1.1.1.3  christos 		      htab->elf.srelgot->reloc_count++;
   2781      1.1     skrll 		      loc += sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
   2782      1.1     skrll 		      bfd_elf64_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &outrel, loc);
   2783      1.1     skrll 		    }
   2784      1.1     skrll 		}
   2785      1.1     skrll 
   2786      1.1     skrll 	      if (h != NULL)
   2787      1.1     skrll 		h->got.offset |= 1;
   2788      1.1     skrll 	      else
   2789      1.1     skrll 		local_got_offsets[r_symndx] |= 1;
   2790      1.1     skrll 	    }
   2791      1.1     skrll 
   2792      1.1     skrll 	  if (off >= (bfd_vma) -2)
   2793      1.1     skrll 	    abort ();
   2794      1.1     skrll 	  if (r_type == ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info))
   2795      1.1     skrll 	    {
   2796  1.1.1.3  christos 	      relocation = htab->elf.sgot->output_offset + off;
   2797      1.1     skrll 	      if (r_type == R_390_TLS_IE64 || r_type == R_390_TLS_IEENT)
   2798  1.1.1.3  christos 		relocation += htab->elf.sgot->output_section->vma;
   2799  1.1.1.9  christos 	      unresolved_reloc = false;
   2800      1.1     skrll 	    }
   2801      1.1     skrll 	  else
   2802      1.1     skrll 	    {
   2803  1.1.1.3  christos 	      bfd_put_64 (output_bfd, htab->elf.sgot->output_offset + off,
   2804      1.1     skrll 			  contents + rel->r_offset);
   2805      1.1     skrll 	      continue;
   2806      1.1     skrll 	    }
   2807      1.1     skrll 	  break;
   2808      1.1     skrll 
   2809      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_GOTIE12:
   2810      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_GOTIE20:
   2811      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_IEENT:
   2812      1.1     skrll 	  if (h == NULL)
   2813      1.1     skrll 	    {
   2814      1.1     skrll 	      if (local_got_offsets == NULL)
   2815      1.1     skrll 		abort();
   2816      1.1     skrll 	      off = local_got_offsets[r_symndx];
   2817  1.1.1.9  christos 	      if (bfd_link_dll (info))
   2818      1.1     skrll 		goto emit_tls_relocs;
   2819      1.1     skrll 	    }
   2820      1.1     skrll 	  else
   2821      1.1     skrll 	    {
   2822      1.1     skrll 	      off = h->got.offset;
   2823      1.1     skrll 	      tls_type = elf_s390_hash_entry(h)->tls_type;
   2824  1.1.1.9  christos 	      if (bfd_link_dll (info) || h->dynindx != -1 || tls_type < GOT_TLS_IE)
   2825      1.1     skrll 		goto emit_tls_relocs;
   2826      1.1     skrll 	    }
   2827      1.1     skrll 
   2828  1.1.1.3  christos 	  if (htab->elf.sgot == NULL)
   2829      1.1     skrll 	    abort ();
   2830      1.1     skrll 
   2831      1.1     skrll 	  BFD_ASSERT (! unresolved_reloc);
   2832      1.1     skrll 	  bfd_put_64 (output_bfd, -tpoff (info, relocation),
   2833  1.1.1.3  christos 		      htab->elf.sgot->contents + off);
   2834  1.1.1.3  christos 	  relocation = htab->elf.sgot->output_offset + off;
   2835      1.1     skrll 	  if (r_type == R_390_TLS_IEENT)
   2836  1.1.1.3  christos 	    relocation += htab->elf.sgot->output_section->vma;
   2837  1.1.1.9  christos 	  unresolved_reloc = false;
   2838      1.1     skrll 	  break;
   2839      1.1     skrll 
   2840      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_LDM64:
   2841  1.1.1.9  christos 	  if (! bfd_link_dll (info))
   2842      1.1     skrll 	    /* The literal pool entry this relocation refers to gets ignored
   2843      1.1     skrll 	       by the optimized code of the local exec model. Do nothing
   2844      1.1     skrll 	       and the value will turn out zero.  */
   2845      1.1     skrll 	    continue;
   2846      1.1     skrll 
   2847  1.1.1.3  christos 	  if (htab->elf.sgot == NULL)
   2848      1.1     skrll 	    abort ();
   2849      1.1     skrll 
   2850      1.1     skrll 	  off = htab->tls_ldm_got.offset;
   2851      1.1     skrll 	  if (off & 1)
   2852      1.1     skrll 	    off &= ~1;
   2853      1.1     skrll 	  else
   2854      1.1     skrll 	    {
   2855      1.1     skrll 	      Elf_Internal_Rela outrel;
   2856      1.1     skrll 	      bfd_byte *loc;
   2857      1.1     skrll 
   2858  1.1.1.3  christos 	      if (htab->elf.srelgot == NULL)
   2859      1.1     skrll 		abort ();
   2860      1.1     skrll 
   2861  1.1.1.3  christos 	      outrel.r_offset = (htab->elf.sgot->output_section->vma
   2862  1.1.1.3  christos 				 + htab->elf.sgot->output_offset + off);
   2863      1.1     skrll 
   2864      1.1     skrll 	      bfd_put_64 (output_bfd, 0,
   2865  1.1.1.3  christos 			  htab->elf.sgot->contents + off + GOT_ENTRY_SIZE);
   2866      1.1     skrll 	      outrel.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (0, R_390_TLS_DTPMOD);
   2867      1.1     skrll 	      outrel.r_addend = 0;
   2868  1.1.1.3  christos 	      loc = htab->elf.srelgot->contents;
   2869  1.1.1.3  christos 	      loc += htab->elf.srelgot->reloc_count++
   2870      1.1     skrll 		* sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
   2871      1.1     skrll 	      bfd_elf64_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &outrel, loc);
   2872      1.1     skrll 	      htab->tls_ldm_got.offset |= 1;
   2873      1.1     skrll 	    }
   2874  1.1.1.3  christos 	  relocation = htab->elf.sgot->output_offset + off;
   2875  1.1.1.9  christos 	  unresolved_reloc = false;
   2876      1.1     skrll 	  break;
   2877      1.1     skrll 
   2878      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_LE64:
   2879  1.1.1.4  christos 	  if (bfd_link_dll (info))
   2880      1.1     skrll 	    {
   2881      1.1     skrll 	      /* Linking a shared library with non-fpic code requires
   2882      1.1     skrll 		 a R_390_TLS_TPOFF relocation.  */
   2883      1.1     skrll 	      Elf_Internal_Rela outrel;
   2884      1.1     skrll 	      asection *sreloc;
   2885      1.1     skrll 	      bfd_byte *loc;
   2886      1.1     skrll 	      int indx;
   2887      1.1     skrll 
   2888      1.1     skrll 	      outrel.r_offset = rel->r_offset
   2889      1.1     skrll 				+ input_section->output_section->vma
   2890      1.1     skrll 				+ input_section->output_offset;
   2891      1.1     skrll 	      if (h != NULL && h->dynindx != -1)
   2892      1.1     skrll 		indx = h->dynindx;
   2893      1.1     skrll 	      else
   2894      1.1     skrll 		indx = 0;
   2895      1.1     skrll 	      outrel.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (indx, R_390_TLS_TPOFF);
   2896      1.1     skrll 	      if (indx == 0)
   2897      1.1     skrll 		outrel.r_addend = relocation - dtpoff_base (info);
   2898      1.1     skrll 	      else
   2899      1.1     skrll 		outrel.r_addend = 0;
   2900      1.1     skrll 	      sreloc = elf_section_data (input_section)->sreloc;
   2901      1.1     skrll 	      if (sreloc == NULL)
   2902      1.1     skrll 		abort ();
   2903      1.1     skrll 	      loc = sreloc->contents;
   2904      1.1     skrll 	      loc += sreloc->reloc_count++ * sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
   2905      1.1     skrll 	      bfd_elf64_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &outrel, loc);
   2906      1.1     skrll 	    }
   2907      1.1     skrll 	  else
   2908      1.1     skrll 	    {
   2909      1.1     skrll 	      BFD_ASSERT (! unresolved_reloc);
   2910      1.1     skrll 	      bfd_put_64 (output_bfd, -tpoff (info, relocation),
   2911      1.1     skrll 			  contents + rel->r_offset);
   2912      1.1     skrll 	    }
   2913      1.1     skrll 	  continue;
   2914      1.1     skrll 
   2915      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_LDO64:
   2916  1.1.1.9  christos 	  if (bfd_link_dll (info) || (input_section->flags & SEC_DEBUGGING))
   2917      1.1     skrll 	    relocation -= dtpoff_base (info);
   2918      1.1     skrll 	  else
   2919      1.1     skrll 	    /* When converting LDO to LE, we must negate.  */
   2920      1.1     skrll 	    relocation = -tpoff (info, relocation);
   2921      1.1     skrll 	  break;
   2922      1.1     skrll 
   2923      1.1     skrll 	  /* Relocations for tls instructions.  */
   2924      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_LOAD:
   2925      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_GDCALL:
   2926      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_LDCALL:
   2927      1.1     skrll 	  tls_type = GOT_UNKNOWN;
   2928      1.1     skrll 	  if (h == NULL && local_got_offsets)
   2929      1.1     skrll 	    tls_type = elf_s390_local_got_tls_type (input_bfd) [r_symndx];
   2930      1.1     skrll 	  else if (h != NULL)
   2931      1.1     skrll 	    tls_type = elf_s390_hash_entry(h)->tls_type;
   2932      1.1     skrll 
   2933      1.1     skrll 	  if (tls_type == GOT_TLS_GD)
   2934      1.1     skrll 	    continue;
   2935      1.1     skrll 
   2936      1.1     skrll 	  if (r_type == R_390_TLS_LOAD)
   2937      1.1     skrll 	    {
   2938  1.1.1.9  christos 	      if (!bfd_link_dll (info) && (h == NULL || h->dynindx == -1))
   2939      1.1     skrll 		{
   2940      1.1     skrll 		  /* IE->LE transition. Four valid cases:
   2941      1.1     skrll 		     lg %rx,(0,%ry)    -> sllg %rx,%ry,0
   2942      1.1     skrll 		     lg %rx,(%ry,0)    -> sllg %rx,%ry,0
   2943      1.1     skrll 		     lg %rx,(%ry,%r12) -> sllg %rx,%ry,0
   2944      1.1     skrll 		     lg %rx,(%r12,%ry) -> sllg %rx,%ry,0  */
   2945      1.1     skrll 		  unsigned int insn0, insn1, ry;
   2946      1.1     skrll 
   2947      1.1     skrll 		  insn0 = bfd_get_32 (input_bfd, contents + rel->r_offset);
   2948      1.1     skrll 		  insn1 = bfd_get_16 (input_bfd, contents + rel->r_offset + 4);
   2949      1.1     skrll 		  if (insn1 != 0x0004)
   2950  1.1.1.6  christos 		    {
   2951  1.1.1.6  christos 		      invalid_tls_insn (input_bfd, input_section, rel);
   2952  1.1.1.9  christos 		      return false;
   2953  1.1.1.6  christos 		    }
   2954      1.1     skrll 		  if ((insn0 & 0xff00f000) == 0xe3000000)
   2955      1.1     skrll 		    /* lg %rx,0(%ry,0) -> sllg %rx,%ry,0  */
   2956      1.1     skrll 		    ry = (insn0 & 0x000f0000);
   2957      1.1     skrll 		  else if ((insn0 & 0xff0f0000) == 0xe3000000)
   2958      1.1     skrll 		    /* lg %rx,0(0,%ry) -> sllg %rx,%ry,0  */
   2959      1.1     skrll 		    ry = (insn0 & 0x0000f000) << 4;
   2960      1.1     skrll 		  else if ((insn0 & 0xff00f000) == 0xe300c000)
   2961      1.1     skrll 		    /* lg %rx,0(%ry,%r12) -> sllg %rx,%ry,0  */
   2962      1.1     skrll 		    ry = (insn0 & 0x000f0000);
   2963      1.1     skrll 		  else if ((insn0 & 0xff0f0000) == 0xe30c0000)
   2964      1.1     skrll 		    /* lg %rx,0(%r12,%ry) -> sllg %rx,%ry,0  */
   2965      1.1     skrll 		    ry = (insn0 & 0x0000f000) << 4;
   2966      1.1     skrll 		  else
   2967  1.1.1.6  christos 		    {
   2968  1.1.1.6  christos 		      invalid_tls_insn (input_bfd, input_section, rel);
   2969  1.1.1.9  christos 		      return false;
   2970  1.1.1.6  christos 		    }
   2971      1.1     skrll 		  insn0 = 0xeb000000 | (insn0 & 0x00f00000) | ry;
   2972      1.1     skrll 		  insn1 = 0x000d;
   2973      1.1     skrll 		  bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, insn0, contents + rel->r_offset);
   2974      1.1     skrll 		  bfd_put_16 (output_bfd, insn1, contents + rel->r_offset + 4);
   2975      1.1     skrll 		}
   2976      1.1     skrll 	    }
   2977      1.1     skrll 	  else if (r_type == R_390_TLS_GDCALL)
   2978      1.1     skrll 	    {
   2979      1.1     skrll 	      unsigned int insn0, insn1;
   2980      1.1     skrll 
   2981      1.1     skrll 	      insn0 = bfd_get_32 (input_bfd, contents + rel->r_offset);
   2982      1.1     skrll 	      insn1 = bfd_get_16 (input_bfd, contents + rel->r_offset + 4);
   2983      1.1     skrll 	      if ((insn0 & 0xffff0000) != 0xc0e50000)
   2984  1.1.1.6  christos 		{
   2985  1.1.1.6  christos 		  invalid_tls_insn (input_bfd, input_section, rel);
   2986  1.1.1.9  christos 		  return false;
   2987  1.1.1.6  christos 		}
   2988  1.1.1.9  christos 	      if (!bfd_link_dll (info) && (h == NULL || h->dynindx == -1))
   2989      1.1     skrll 		{
   2990      1.1     skrll 		  /* GD->LE transition.
   2991      1.1     skrll 		     brasl %r14,__tls_get_addr@plt -> brcl 0,. */
   2992      1.1     skrll 		  insn0 = 0xc0040000;
   2993      1.1     skrll 		  insn1 = 0x0000;
   2994      1.1     skrll 		}
   2995      1.1     skrll 	      else
   2996      1.1     skrll 		{
   2997      1.1     skrll 		  /* GD->IE transition.
   2998      1.1     skrll 		     brasl %r14,__tls_get_addr@plt -> lg %r2,0(%r2,%r12)  */
   2999      1.1     skrll 		  insn0 = 0xe322c000;
   3000      1.1     skrll 		  insn1 = 0x0004;
   3001      1.1     skrll 		}
   3002      1.1     skrll 	      bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, insn0, contents + rel->r_offset);
   3003      1.1     skrll 	      bfd_put_16 (output_bfd, insn1, contents + rel->r_offset + 4);
   3004      1.1     skrll 	    }
   3005      1.1     skrll 	  else if (r_type == R_390_TLS_LDCALL)
   3006      1.1     skrll 	    {
   3007  1.1.1.9  christos 	      if (!bfd_link_dll (info))
   3008      1.1     skrll 		{
   3009      1.1     skrll 		  unsigned int insn0, insn1;
   3010      1.1     skrll 
   3011      1.1     skrll 		  insn0 = bfd_get_32 (input_bfd, contents + rel->r_offset);
   3012      1.1     skrll 		  insn1 = bfd_get_16 (input_bfd, contents + rel->r_offset + 4);
   3013      1.1     skrll 		  if ((insn0 & 0xffff0000) != 0xc0e50000)
   3014  1.1.1.6  christos 		    {
   3015  1.1.1.6  christos 		      invalid_tls_insn (input_bfd, input_section, rel);
   3016  1.1.1.9  christos 		      return false;
   3017  1.1.1.6  christos 		    }
   3018      1.1     skrll 		  /* LD->LE transition.
   3019      1.1     skrll 		     brasl %r14,__tls_get_addr@plt -> brcl 0,. */
   3020      1.1     skrll 		  insn0 = 0xc0040000;
   3021      1.1     skrll 		  insn1 = 0x0000;
   3022      1.1     skrll 		  bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, insn0, contents + rel->r_offset);
   3023      1.1     skrll 		  bfd_put_16 (output_bfd, insn1, contents + rel->r_offset + 4);
   3024      1.1     skrll 		}
   3025      1.1     skrll 	    }
   3026      1.1     skrll 	  continue;
   3027      1.1     skrll 
   3028      1.1     skrll 	default:
   3029      1.1     skrll 	  break;
   3030      1.1     skrll 	}
   3031      1.1     skrll 
   3032      1.1     skrll       /* Dynamic relocs are not propagated for SEC_DEBUGGING sections
   3033      1.1     skrll 	 because such sections are not SEC_ALLOC and thus ld.so will
   3034      1.1     skrll 	 not process them.  */
   3035      1.1     skrll       if (unresolved_reloc
   3036      1.1     skrll 	  && !((input_section->flags & SEC_DEBUGGING) != 0
   3037  1.1.1.3  christos 	       && h->def_dynamic)
   3038  1.1.1.3  christos 	  && _bfd_elf_section_offset (output_bfd, info, input_section,
   3039  1.1.1.3  christos 				      rel->r_offset) != (bfd_vma) -1)
   3040  1.1.1.6  christos 	_bfd_error_handler
   3041  1.1.1.6  christos 	  /* xgettext:c-format */
   3042  1.1.1.7  christos 	  (_("%pB(%pA+%#" PRIx64 "): "
   3043  1.1.1.7  christos 	     "unresolvable %s relocation against symbol `%s'"),
   3044      1.1     skrll 	   input_bfd,
   3045      1.1     skrll 	   input_section,
   3046  1.1.1.7  christos 	   (uint64_t) rel->r_offset,
   3047      1.1     skrll 	   howto->name,
   3048      1.1     skrll 	   h->root.root.string);
   3049      1.1     skrll 
   3050  1.1.1.3  christos     do_relocation:
   3051  1.1.1.3  christos 
   3052  1.1.1.4  christos       /* When applying a 24 bit reloc we need to start one byte
   3053  1.1.1.4  christos 	 earlier.  Otherwise the 32 bit get/put bfd operations might
   3054  1.1.1.4  christos 	 access a byte after the actual section.  */
   3055  1.1.1.4  christos       if (r_type == R_390_PC24DBL
   3056  1.1.1.4  christos 	  || r_type == R_390_PLT24DBL)
   3057  1.1.1.4  christos 	rel->r_offset--;
   3058  1.1.1.4  christos 
   3059      1.1     skrll       if (r_type == R_390_20
   3060      1.1     skrll 	  || r_type == R_390_GOT20
   3061      1.1     skrll 	  || r_type == R_390_GOTPLT20
   3062      1.1     skrll 	  || r_type == R_390_TLS_GOTIE20)
   3063      1.1     skrll 	{
   3064      1.1     skrll 	  relocation += rel->r_addend;
   3065      1.1     skrll 	  relocation = (relocation&0xfff) << 8 | (relocation&0xff000) >> 12;
   3066      1.1     skrll 	  r = _bfd_final_link_relocate (howto, input_bfd, input_section,
   3067      1.1     skrll 					contents, rel->r_offset,
   3068      1.1     skrll 					relocation, 0);
   3069      1.1     skrll 	}
   3070      1.1     skrll       else
   3071      1.1     skrll 	r = _bfd_final_link_relocate (howto, input_bfd, input_section,
   3072      1.1     skrll 				      contents, rel->r_offset,
   3073      1.1     skrll 				      relocation, rel->r_addend);
   3074      1.1     skrll 
   3075      1.1     skrll       if (r != bfd_reloc_ok)
   3076      1.1     skrll 	{
   3077      1.1     skrll 	  const char *name;
   3078      1.1     skrll 
   3079      1.1     skrll 	  if (h != NULL)
   3080      1.1     skrll 	    name = h->root.root.string;
   3081      1.1     skrll 	  else
   3082      1.1     skrll 	    {
   3083      1.1     skrll 	      name = bfd_elf_string_from_elf_section (input_bfd,
   3084      1.1     skrll 						      symtab_hdr->sh_link,
   3085      1.1     skrll 						      sym->st_name);
   3086      1.1     skrll 	      if (name == NULL)
   3087  1.1.1.9  christos 		return false;
   3088      1.1     skrll 	      if (*name == '\0')
   3089  1.1.1.8  christos 		name = bfd_section_name (sec);
   3090      1.1     skrll 	    }
   3091      1.1     skrll 
   3092      1.1     skrll 	  if (r == bfd_reloc_overflow)
   3093  1.1.1.5  christos 	    (*info->callbacks->reloc_overflow)
   3094  1.1.1.5  christos 	      (info, (h ? &h->root : NULL), name, howto->name,
   3095  1.1.1.5  christos 	       (bfd_vma) 0, input_bfd, input_section, rel->r_offset);
   3096      1.1     skrll 	  else
   3097      1.1     skrll 	    {
   3098  1.1.1.6  christos 	      _bfd_error_handler
   3099  1.1.1.6  christos 		/* xgettext:c-format */
   3100  1.1.1.7  christos 		(_("%pB(%pA+%#" PRIx64 "): reloc against `%s': error %d"),
   3101      1.1     skrll 		 input_bfd, input_section,
   3102  1.1.1.7  christos 		 (uint64_t) rel->r_offset, name, (int) r);
   3103  1.1.1.9  christos 	      return false;
   3104      1.1     skrll 	    }
   3105      1.1     skrll 	}
   3106      1.1     skrll     }
   3107      1.1     skrll 
   3108  1.1.1.9  christos   return true;
   3109      1.1     skrll }
   3110      1.1     skrll 
   3111  1.1.1.3  christos /* Generate the PLT slots together with the dynamic relocations needed
   3112  1.1.1.3  christos    for IFUNC symbols.  */
   3113  1.1.1.3  christos 
   3114  1.1.1.3  christos static void
   3115  1.1.1.3  christos elf_s390_finish_ifunc_symbol (bfd *output_bfd,
   3116  1.1.1.3  christos 			      struct bfd_link_info *info,
   3117  1.1.1.3  christos 			      struct elf_link_hash_entry *h,
   3118  1.1.1.3  christos 			      struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *htab,
   3119  1.1.1.3  christos 			      bfd_vma plt_offset,
   3120  1.1.1.3  christos 			      bfd_vma resolver_address)
   3121  1.1.1.3  christos {
   3122  1.1.1.3  christos   bfd_vma plt_index;
   3123  1.1.1.3  christos   bfd_vma got_offset;
   3124  1.1.1.3  christos   Elf_Internal_Rela rela;
   3125  1.1.1.3  christos   bfd_byte *loc;
   3126  1.1.1.3  christos   asection *plt, *gotplt, *relplt;
   3127  1.1.1.3  christos 
   3128  1.1.1.3  christos   if (htab->elf.iplt == NULL
   3129  1.1.1.3  christos       || htab->elf.igotplt == NULL
   3130  1.1.1.3  christos       || htab->elf.irelplt == NULL)
   3131  1.1.1.3  christos     abort ();
   3132  1.1.1.3  christos 
   3133  1.1.1.3  christos   /* Index of the PLT slot within iplt section.  */
   3134  1.1.1.3  christos   plt_index = plt_offset / PLT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   3135  1.1.1.3  christos   plt = htab->elf.iplt;
   3136  1.1.1.3  christos   /* Offset into the igot.plt section.  */
   3137  1.1.1.3  christos   got_offset = plt_index * GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   3138  1.1.1.3  christos   gotplt = htab->elf.igotplt;
   3139  1.1.1.3  christos   relplt = htab->elf.irelplt;
   3140  1.1.1.3  christos 
   3141  1.1.1.3  christos   /* Fill in the blueprint of a PLT.  */
   3142  1.1.1.3  christos   memcpy (plt->contents + plt_offset, elf_s390x_plt_entry,
   3143  1.1.1.3  christos 	  PLT_ENTRY_SIZE);
   3144  1.1.1.3  christos 
   3145  1.1.1.3  christos   /* Fixup the relative address to the GOT entry */
   3146  1.1.1.3  christos   bfd_put_32 (output_bfd,
   3147  1.1.1.3  christos 	      (gotplt->output_section->vma +
   3148  1.1.1.3  christos 	       gotplt->output_offset + got_offset
   3149  1.1.1.3  christos 	       - (plt->output_section->vma +
   3150  1.1.1.3  christos 		  plt->output_offset +
   3151  1.1.1.3  christos 		  plt_offset))/2,
   3152  1.1.1.3  christos 	      plt->contents + plt_offset + 2);
   3153  1.1.1.3  christos   /* Fixup the relative branch to PLT 0 */
   3154  1.1.1.3  christos   bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, - (plt->output_offset +
   3155  1.1.1.3  christos 			     (PLT_ENTRY_SIZE * plt_index) + 22)/2,
   3156  1.1.1.3  christos 	      plt->contents + plt_offset + 24);
   3157  1.1.1.3  christos   /* Fixup offset into .rela.plt section.  */
   3158  1.1.1.3  christos   bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, relplt->output_offset +
   3159  1.1.1.3  christos 	      plt_index * sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela),
   3160  1.1.1.3  christos 	      plt->contents + plt_offset + 28);
   3161  1.1.1.3  christos 
   3162  1.1.1.3  christos   /* Fill in the entry in the global offset table.
   3163  1.1.1.3  christos      Points to instruction after GOT offset.  */
   3164  1.1.1.3  christos   bfd_put_64 (output_bfd,
   3165  1.1.1.3  christos 	      (plt->output_section->vma
   3166  1.1.1.3  christos 	       + plt->output_offset
   3167  1.1.1.3  christos 	       + plt_offset
   3168  1.1.1.3  christos 	       + 14),
   3169  1.1.1.3  christos 	      gotplt->contents + got_offset);
   3170  1.1.1.3  christos 
   3171  1.1.1.3  christos   /* Fill in the entry in the .rela.plt section.  */
   3172  1.1.1.3  christos   rela.r_offset = (gotplt->output_section->vma
   3173  1.1.1.3  christos 		   + gotplt->output_offset
   3174  1.1.1.3  christos 		   + got_offset);
   3175  1.1.1.3  christos 
   3176  1.1.1.3  christos   if (!h
   3177  1.1.1.3  christos       || h->dynindx == -1
   3178  1.1.1.4  christos       || ((bfd_link_executable (info)
   3179  1.1.1.3  christos 	   || ELF_ST_VISIBILITY (h->other) != STV_DEFAULT)
   3180  1.1.1.3  christos 	  && h->def_regular))
   3181  1.1.1.3  christos     {
   3182  1.1.1.3  christos       /* The symbol can be locally resolved.  */
   3183  1.1.1.3  christos       rela.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (0, R_390_IRELATIVE);
   3184  1.1.1.3  christos       rela.r_addend = resolver_address;
   3185  1.1.1.3  christos     }
   3186  1.1.1.3  christos   else
   3187  1.1.1.3  christos     {
   3188  1.1.1.3  christos       rela.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (h->dynindx, R_390_JMP_SLOT);
   3189  1.1.1.3  christos       rela.r_addend = 0;
   3190  1.1.1.3  christos     }
   3191  1.1.1.3  christos 
   3192  1.1.1.3  christos   loc = relplt->contents + plt_index * sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
   3193  1.1.1.3  christos   bfd_elf64_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &rela, loc);
   3194  1.1.1.3  christos }
   3195  1.1.1.3  christos 
   3196  1.1.1.3  christos 
   3197      1.1     skrll /* Finish up dynamic symbol handling.  We set the contents of various
   3198      1.1     skrll    dynamic sections here.  */
   3199      1.1     skrll 
   3200  1.1.1.9  christos static bool
   3201  1.1.1.2  christos elf_s390_finish_dynamic_symbol (bfd *output_bfd,
   3202  1.1.1.2  christos 				struct bfd_link_info *info,
   3203  1.1.1.2  christos 				struct elf_link_hash_entry *h,
   3204  1.1.1.2  christos 				Elf_Internal_Sym *sym)
   3205      1.1     skrll {
   3206      1.1     skrll   struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *htab;
   3207  1.1.1.3  christos   struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *eh = (struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry*)h;
   3208      1.1     skrll 
   3209      1.1     skrll   htab = elf_s390_hash_table (info);
   3210  1.1.1.2  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   3211  1.1.1.9  christos     return false;
   3212      1.1     skrll 
   3213      1.1     skrll   if (h->plt.offset != (bfd_vma) -1)
   3214      1.1     skrll     {
   3215      1.1     skrll       bfd_vma plt_index;
   3216  1.1.1.8  christos       bfd_vma gotplt_offset;
   3217      1.1     skrll       Elf_Internal_Rela rela;
   3218      1.1     skrll       bfd_byte *loc;
   3219      1.1     skrll 
   3220      1.1     skrll       /* This symbol has an entry in the procedure linkage table.  Set
   3221      1.1     skrll 	 it up.  */
   3222  1.1.1.4  christos       if (s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p (h) && h->def_regular)
   3223  1.1.1.3  christos 	{
   3224  1.1.1.4  christos 	  elf_s390_finish_ifunc_symbol (output_bfd, info, h,
   3225  1.1.1.4  christos 	    htab, h->plt.offset,
   3226  1.1.1.4  christos 	    eh->ifunc_resolver_address +
   3227  1.1.1.4  christos 	    eh->ifunc_resolver_section->output_offset +
   3228  1.1.1.4  christos 	    eh->ifunc_resolver_section->output_section->vma);
   3229  1.1.1.4  christos 
   3230  1.1.1.4  christos 	  /* Do not return yet.  Handling of explicit GOT slots of
   3231  1.1.1.4  christos 	     IFUNC symbols is below.  */
   3232  1.1.1.3  christos 	}
   3233  1.1.1.3  christos       else
   3234  1.1.1.3  christos 	{
   3235  1.1.1.3  christos 	  if (h->dynindx == -1
   3236  1.1.1.3  christos 	      || htab->elf.splt == NULL
   3237  1.1.1.3  christos 	      || htab->elf.sgotplt == NULL
   3238  1.1.1.3  christos 	      || htab->elf.srelplt == NULL)
   3239  1.1.1.3  christos 	    abort ();
   3240      1.1     skrll 
   3241  1.1.1.3  christos 	  /* Calc. index no.
   3242  1.1.1.3  christos 	     Current offset - size first entry / entry size.  */
   3243  1.1.1.3  christos 	  plt_index = (h->plt.offset - PLT_FIRST_ENTRY_SIZE) / PLT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   3244  1.1.1.3  christos 
   3245  1.1.1.8  christos 	  /* The slots in the .got.plt correspond to the PLT slots in
   3246  1.1.1.8  christos 	     the same order.  */
   3247  1.1.1.8  christos 	  gotplt_offset = plt_index * GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   3248  1.1.1.8  christos 
   3249  1.1.1.8  christos 	  /* If .got.plt comes first it needs to contain the 3 header
   3250  1.1.1.8  christos 	     entries.  */
   3251  1.1.1.8  christos 	  if (!s390_gotplt_after_got_p (info))
   3252  1.1.1.8  christos 	    gotplt_offset += 3 * GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   3253  1.1.1.3  christos 
   3254  1.1.1.3  christos 	  /* Fill in the blueprint of a PLT.  */
   3255  1.1.1.3  christos 	  memcpy (htab->elf.splt->contents + h->plt.offset, elf_s390x_plt_entry,
   3256  1.1.1.3  christos 		  PLT_ENTRY_SIZE);
   3257      1.1     skrll 
   3258  1.1.1.8  christos 	  /* The first instruction in the PLT entry is a LARL loading
   3259  1.1.1.8  christos 	     the address of the GOT slot.  We write the 4 byte
   3260  1.1.1.8  christos 	     immediate operand of the LARL instruction here.  */
   3261  1.1.1.3  christos 	  bfd_put_32 (output_bfd,
   3262  1.1.1.3  christos 		      (htab->elf.sgotplt->output_section->vma +
   3263  1.1.1.8  christos 		       htab->elf.sgotplt->output_offset + gotplt_offset
   3264  1.1.1.3  christos 		       - (htab->elf.splt->output_section->vma +
   3265  1.1.1.3  christos 			  htab->elf.splt->output_offset +
   3266  1.1.1.3  christos 			  h->plt.offset))/2,
   3267  1.1.1.3  christos 		      htab->elf.splt->contents + h->plt.offset + 2);
   3268  1.1.1.3  christos 	  /* Fixup the relative branch to PLT 0 */
   3269  1.1.1.3  christos 	  bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, - (PLT_FIRST_ENTRY_SIZE +
   3270  1.1.1.3  christos 				     (PLT_ENTRY_SIZE * plt_index) + 22)/2,
   3271  1.1.1.3  christos 		      htab->elf.splt->contents + h->plt.offset + 24);
   3272  1.1.1.3  christos 	  /* Fixup offset into .rela.plt section.  */
   3273  1.1.1.3  christos 	  bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, plt_index * sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela),
   3274  1.1.1.3  christos 		      htab->elf.splt->contents + h->plt.offset + 28);
   3275      1.1     skrll 
   3276  1.1.1.3  christos 	  /* Fill in the entry in the global offset table.
   3277  1.1.1.3  christos 	     Points to instruction after GOT offset.  */
   3278  1.1.1.3  christos 	  bfd_put_64 (output_bfd,
   3279  1.1.1.3  christos 		      (htab->elf.splt->output_section->vma
   3280  1.1.1.3  christos 		       + htab->elf.splt->output_offset
   3281  1.1.1.3  christos 		       + h->plt.offset
   3282  1.1.1.3  christos 		       + 14),
   3283  1.1.1.8  christos 		      htab->elf.sgotplt->contents + gotplt_offset);
   3284  1.1.1.3  christos 
   3285  1.1.1.3  christos 	  /* Fill in the entry in the .rela.plt section.  */
   3286  1.1.1.3  christos 	  rela.r_offset = (htab->elf.sgotplt->output_section->vma
   3287  1.1.1.3  christos 			   + htab->elf.sgotplt->output_offset
   3288  1.1.1.8  christos 			   + gotplt_offset);
   3289  1.1.1.3  christos 	  rela.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (h->dynindx, R_390_JMP_SLOT);
   3290  1.1.1.3  christos 	  rela.r_addend = 0;
   3291  1.1.1.3  christos 	  loc = htab->elf.srelplt->contents + plt_index *
   3292  1.1.1.3  christos 	    sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
   3293  1.1.1.3  christos 	  bfd_elf64_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &rela, loc);
   3294  1.1.1.3  christos 
   3295  1.1.1.3  christos 	  if (!h->def_regular)
   3296  1.1.1.3  christos 	    {
   3297  1.1.1.3  christos 	      /* Mark the symbol as undefined, rather than as defined in
   3298  1.1.1.3  christos 		 the .plt section.  Leave the value alone.  This is a clue
   3299  1.1.1.3  christos 		 for the dynamic linker, to make function pointer
   3300  1.1.1.3  christos 		 comparisons work between an application and shared
   3301  1.1.1.3  christos 		 library.  */
   3302  1.1.1.3  christos 	      sym->st_shndx = SHN_UNDEF;
   3303  1.1.1.3  christos 	    }
   3304      1.1     skrll 	}
   3305      1.1     skrll     }
   3306      1.1     skrll 
   3307      1.1     skrll   if (h->got.offset != (bfd_vma) -1
   3308      1.1     skrll       && elf_s390_hash_entry(h)->tls_type != GOT_TLS_GD
   3309      1.1     skrll       && elf_s390_hash_entry(h)->tls_type != GOT_TLS_IE
   3310      1.1     skrll       && elf_s390_hash_entry(h)->tls_type != GOT_TLS_IE_NLT)
   3311      1.1     skrll     {
   3312      1.1     skrll       Elf_Internal_Rela rela;
   3313      1.1     skrll       bfd_byte *loc;
   3314      1.1     skrll 
   3315      1.1     skrll       /* This symbol has an entry in the global offset table.  Set it
   3316      1.1     skrll 	 up.  */
   3317  1.1.1.3  christos       if (htab->elf.sgot == NULL || htab->elf.srelgot == NULL)
   3318      1.1     skrll 	abort ();
   3319      1.1     skrll 
   3320  1.1.1.3  christos       rela.r_offset = (htab->elf.sgot->output_section->vma
   3321  1.1.1.3  christos 		       + htab->elf.sgot->output_offset
   3322      1.1     skrll 		       + (h->got.offset &~ (bfd_vma) 1));
   3323      1.1     skrll 
   3324  1.1.1.3  christos       if (h->def_regular && s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p (h))
   3325  1.1.1.3  christos 	{
   3326  1.1.1.4  christos 	  if (bfd_link_pic (info))
   3327  1.1.1.3  christos 	    {
   3328  1.1.1.3  christos 	      /* An explicit GOT slot usage needs GLOB_DAT.  If the
   3329  1.1.1.3  christos 		 symbol references local the implicit got.iplt slot
   3330  1.1.1.3  christos 		 will be used and the IRELATIVE reloc has been created
   3331  1.1.1.3  christos 		 above.  */
   3332  1.1.1.3  christos 	      goto do_glob_dat;
   3333  1.1.1.3  christos 	    }
   3334  1.1.1.3  christos 	  else
   3335  1.1.1.3  christos 	    {
   3336  1.1.1.3  christos 	      /* For non-shared objects explicit GOT slots must be
   3337  1.1.1.3  christos 		 filled with the PLT slot address for pointer
   3338  1.1.1.3  christos 		 equality reasons.  */
   3339  1.1.1.3  christos 	      bfd_put_64 (output_bfd, (htab->elf.iplt->output_section->vma
   3340  1.1.1.3  christos 				       + htab->elf.iplt->output_offset
   3341  1.1.1.3  christos 				       + h->plt.offset),
   3342  1.1.1.3  christos 			  htab->elf.sgot->contents + h->got.offset);
   3343  1.1.1.9  christos 	      return true;
   3344  1.1.1.3  christos 	    }
   3345  1.1.1.3  christos 	}
   3346  1.1.1.4  christos       else if (bfd_link_pic (info)
   3347  1.1.1.6  christos 	       && SYMBOL_REFERENCES_LOCAL (info, h))
   3348      1.1     skrll 	{
   3349  1.1.1.6  christos 	  if (UNDEFWEAK_NO_DYNAMIC_RELOC (info, h))
   3350  1.1.1.9  christos 	    return true;
   3351  1.1.1.6  christos 
   3352  1.1.1.3  christos 	  /* If this is a static link, or it is a -Bsymbolic link and
   3353  1.1.1.3  christos 	     the symbol is defined locally or was forced to be local
   3354  1.1.1.3  christos 	     because of a version file, we just want to emit a
   3355  1.1.1.3  christos 	     RELATIVE reloc.  The entry in the global offset table
   3356  1.1.1.3  christos 	     will already have been initialized in the
   3357  1.1.1.3  christos 	     relocate_section function.  */
   3358  1.1.1.6  christos 	  if (!(h->def_regular || ELF_COMMON_DEF_P (h)))
   3359  1.1.1.9  christos 	    return false;
   3360      1.1     skrll 	  BFD_ASSERT((h->got.offset & 1) != 0);
   3361      1.1     skrll 	  rela.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (0, R_390_RELATIVE);
   3362      1.1     skrll 	  rela.r_addend = (h->root.u.def.value
   3363      1.1     skrll 			   + h->root.u.def.section->output_section->vma
   3364      1.1     skrll 			   + h->root.u.def.section->output_offset);
   3365      1.1     skrll 	}
   3366      1.1     skrll       else
   3367      1.1     skrll 	{
   3368      1.1     skrll 	  BFD_ASSERT((h->got.offset & 1) == 0);
   3369  1.1.1.6  christos 	do_glob_dat:
   3370  1.1.1.3  christos 	  bfd_put_64 (output_bfd, (bfd_vma) 0, htab->elf.sgot->contents + h->got.offset);
   3371      1.1     skrll 	  rela.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (h->dynindx, R_390_GLOB_DAT);
   3372      1.1     skrll 	  rela.r_addend = 0;
   3373      1.1     skrll 	}
   3374      1.1     skrll 
   3375  1.1.1.3  christos       loc = htab->elf.srelgot->contents;
   3376  1.1.1.3  christos       loc += htab->elf.srelgot->reloc_count++ * sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
   3377      1.1     skrll       bfd_elf64_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &rela, loc);
   3378      1.1     skrll     }
   3379      1.1     skrll 
   3380      1.1     skrll   if (h->needs_copy)
   3381      1.1     skrll     {
   3382      1.1     skrll       Elf_Internal_Rela rela;
   3383  1.1.1.6  christos       asection *s;
   3384      1.1     skrll       bfd_byte *loc;
   3385      1.1     skrll 
   3386      1.1     skrll       /* This symbols needs a copy reloc.  Set it up.  */
   3387      1.1     skrll 
   3388      1.1     skrll       if (h->dynindx == -1
   3389      1.1     skrll 	  || (h->root.type != bfd_link_hash_defined
   3390      1.1     skrll 	      && h->root.type != bfd_link_hash_defweak)
   3391  1.1.1.6  christos 	  || htab->elf.srelbss == NULL)
   3392      1.1     skrll 	abort ();
   3393      1.1     skrll 
   3394      1.1     skrll       rela.r_offset = (h->root.u.def.value
   3395      1.1     skrll 		       + h->root.u.def.section->output_section->vma
   3396      1.1     skrll 		       + h->root.u.def.section->output_offset);
   3397      1.1     skrll       rela.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (h->dynindx, R_390_COPY);
   3398      1.1     skrll       rela.r_addend = 0;
   3399  1.1.1.6  christos       if (h->root.u.def.section == htab->elf.sdynrelro)
   3400  1.1.1.6  christos 	s = htab->elf.sreldynrelro;
   3401  1.1.1.6  christos       else
   3402  1.1.1.6  christos 	s = htab->elf.srelbss;
   3403  1.1.1.6  christos       loc = s->contents + s->reloc_count++ * sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
   3404      1.1     skrll       bfd_elf64_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &rela, loc);
   3405      1.1     skrll     }
   3406      1.1     skrll 
   3407      1.1     skrll   /* Mark some specially defined symbols as absolute.  */
   3408  1.1.1.4  christos   if (h == htab->elf.hdynamic
   3409      1.1     skrll       || h == htab->elf.hgot
   3410      1.1     skrll       || h == htab->elf.hplt)
   3411      1.1     skrll     sym->st_shndx = SHN_ABS;
   3412      1.1     skrll 
   3413  1.1.1.9  christos   return true;
   3414      1.1     skrll }
   3415      1.1     skrll 
   3416      1.1     skrll /* Used to decide how to sort relocs in an optimal manner for the
   3417      1.1     skrll    dynamic linker, before writing them out.  */
   3418      1.1     skrll 
   3419      1.1     skrll static enum elf_reloc_type_class
   3420  1.1.1.4  christos elf_s390_reloc_type_class (const struct bfd_link_info *info ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
   3421  1.1.1.4  christos 			   const asection *rel_sec ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
   3422  1.1.1.4  christos 			   const Elf_Internal_Rela *rela)
   3423  1.1.1.4  christos {
   3424  1.1.1.4  christos   bfd *abfd = info->output_bfd;
   3425  1.1.1.4  christos   const struct elf_backend_data *bed = get_elf_backend_data (abfd);
   3426  1.1.1.4  christos   struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *htab = elf_s390_hash_table (info);
   3427  1.1.1.4  christos   unsigned long r_symndx = ELF64_R_SYM (rela->r_info);
   3428  1.1.1.4  christos   Elf_Internal_Sym sym;
   3429  1.1.1.4  christos 
   3430  1.1.1.4  christos   if (htab->elf.dynsym == NULL
   3431  1.1.1.4  christos       || !bed->s->swap_symbol_in (abfd,
   3432  1.1.1.4  christos 				  (htab->elf.dynsym->contents
   3433  1.1.1.4  christos 				   + r_symndx * bed->s->sizeof_sym),
   3434  1.1.1.4  christos 				  0, &sym))
   3435  1.1.1.4  christos     abort ();
   3436  1.1.1.4  christos 
   3437  1.1.1.4  christos   /* Check relocation against STT_GNU_IFUNC symbol.  */
   3438  1.1.1.4  christos   if (ELF_ST_TYPE (sym.st_info) == STT_GNU_IFUNC)
   3439  1.1.1.4  christos     return reloc_class_ifunc;
   3440  1.1.1.4  christos 
   3441      1.1     skrll   switch ((int) ELF64_R_TYPE (rela->r_info))
   3442      1.1     skrll     {
   3443      1.1     skrll     case R_390_RELATIVE:
   3444      1.1     skrll       return reloc_class_relative;
   3445      1.1     skrll     case R_390_JMP_SLOT:
   3446      1.1     skrll       return reloc_class_plt;
   3447      1.1     skrll     case R_390_COPY:
   3448      1.1     skrll       return reloc_class_copy;
   3449      1.1     skrll     default:
   3450      1.1     skrll       return reloc_class_normal;
   3451      1.1     skrll     }
   3452      1.1     skrll }
   3453      1.1     skrll 
   3454      1.1     skrll /* Finish up the dynamic sections.  */
   3455      1.1     skrll 
   3456  1.1.1.9  christos static bool
   3457  1.1.1.2  christos elf_s390_finish_dynamic_sections (bfd *output_bfd,
   3458  1.1.1.2  christos 				  struct bfd_link_info *info)
   3459      1.1     skrll {
   3460      1.1     skrll   struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *htab;
   3461      1.1     skrll   bfd *dynobj;
   3462      1.1     skrll   asection *sdyn;
   3463  1.1.1.3  christos   bfd *ibfd;
   3464  1.1.1.3  christos   unsigned int i;
   3465      1.1     skrll 
   3466      1.1     skrll   htab = elf_s390_hash_table (info);
   3467  1.1.1.2  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   3468  1.1.1.9  christos     return false;
   3469  1.1.1.2  christos 
   3470      1.1     skrll   dynobj = htab->elf.dynobj;
   3471  1.1.1.3  christos   sdyn = bfd_get_linker_section (dynobj, ".dynamic");
   3472      1.1     skrll 
   3473      1.1     skrll   if (htab->elf.dynamic_sections_created)
   3474      1.1     skrll     {
   3475      1.1     skrll       Elf64_External_Dyn *dyncon, *dynconend;
   3476      1.1     skrll 
   3477  1.1.1.3  christos       if (sdyn == NULL || htab->elf.sgot == NULL)
   3478      1.1     skrll 	abort ();
   3479      1.1     skrll 
   3480      1.1     skrll       dyncon = (Elf64_External_Dyn *) sdyn->contents;
   3481      1.1     skrll       dynconend = (Elf64_External_Dyn *) (sdyn->contents + sdyn->size);
   3482      1.1     skrll       for (; dyncon < dynconend; dyncon++)
   3483      1.1     skrll 	{
   3484      1.1     skrll 	  Elf_Internal_Dyn dyn;
   3485      1.1     skrll 	  asection *s;
   3486      1.1     skrll 
   3487      1.1     skrll 	  bfd_elf64_swap_dyn_in (dynobj, dyncon, &dyn);
   3488      1.1     skrll 
   3489      1.1     skrll 	  switch (dyn.d_tag)
   3490      1.1     skrll 	    {
   3491      1.1     skrll 	    default:
   3492      1.1     skrll 	      continue;
   3493      1.1     skrll 
   3494      1.1     skrll 	    case DT_PLTGOT:
   3495  1.1.1.8  christos 	      /* DT_PLTGOT matches _GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_ */
   3496  1.1.1.8  christos 	      dyn.d_un.d_ptr = s390_got_pointer (info);
   3497      1.1     skrll 	      break;
   3498      1.1     skrll 
   3499      1.1     skrll 	    case DT_JMPREL:
   3500  1.1.1.5  christos 	      s = htab->elf.srelplt;
   3501  1.1.1.5  christos 	      dyn.d_un.d_ptr = s->output_section->vma + s->output_offset;
   3502      1.1     skrll 	      break;
   3503      1.1     skrll 
   3504      1.1     skrll 	    case DT_PLTRELSZ:
   3505  1.1.1.6  christos 	      dyn.d_un.d_val = htab->elf.srelplt->size;
   3506  1.1.1.6  christos 	      if (htab->elf.irelplt)
   3507  1.1.1.6  christos 		dyn.d_un.d_val += htab->elf.irelplt->size;
   3508      1.1     skrll 	      break;
   3509      1.1     skrll 
   3510      1.1     skrll 	    case DT_RELASZ:
   3511      1.1     skrll 	      /* The procedure linkage table relocs (DT_JMPREL) should
   3512      1.1     skrll 		 not be included in the overall relocs (DT_RELA).
   3513      1.1     skrll 		 Therefore, we override the DT_RELASZ entry here to
   3514      1.1     skrll 		 make it not include the JMPREL relocs.  Since the
   3515      1.1     skrll 		 linker script arranges for .rela.plt to follow all
   3516      1.1     skrll 		 other relocation sections, we don't have to worry
   3517      1.1     skrll 		 about changing the DT_RELA entry.  */
   3518  1.1.1.6  christos 	      dyn.d_un.d_val -= htab->elf.srelplt->size;
   3519  1.1.1.6  christos 	      if (htab->elf.irelplt)
   3520  1.1.1.6  christos 		dyn.d_un.d_val -= htab->elf.irelplt->size;
   3521      1.1     skrll 	      break;
   3522      1.1     skrll 	    }
   3523      1.1     skrll 
   3524      1.1     skrll 	  bfd_elf64_swap_dyn_out (output_bfd, &dyn, dyncon);
   3525      1.1     skrll 	}
   3526      1.1     skrll 
   3527      1.1     skrll       /* Fill in the special first entry in the procedure linkage table.  */
   3528  1.1.1.3  christos       if (htab->elf.splt && htab->elf.splt->size > 0)
   3529      1.1     skrll 	{
   3530      1.1     skrll 	  /* fill in blueprint for plt 0 entry */
   3531  1.1.1.3  christos 	  memcpy (htab->elf.splt->contents, elf_s390x_first_plt_entry,
   3532  1.1.1.3  christos 		  PLT_FIRST_ENTRY_SIZE);
   3533  1.1.1.8  christos 	  /* The second instruction in the first PLT entry is a LARL
   3534  1.1.1.8  christos 	     loading the GOT pointer.  Fill in the LARL immediate
   3535  1.1.1.8  christos 	     address.  */
   3536      1.1     skrll 	  bfd_put_32 (output_bfd,
   3537  1.1.1.8  christos 		      (s390_got_pointer (info)
   3538  1.1.1.5  christos 		       - htab->elf.splt->output_section->vma
   3539  1.1.1.5  christos 		       - htab->elf.splt->output_offset - 6)/2,
   3540  1.1.1.3  christos 		      htab->elf.splt->contents + 8);
   3541      1.1     skrll 	}
   3542  1.1.1.4  christos       if (elf_section_data (htab->elf.splt->output_section) != NULL)
   3543  1.1.1.4  christos 	elf_section_data (htab->elf.splt->output_section)->this_hdr.sh_entsize
   3544  1.1.1.4  christos 	  = PLT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   3545      1.1     skrll     }
   3546      1.1     skrll 
   3547  1.1.1.8  christos   if (htab->elf.hgot && htab->elf.hgot->root.u.def.section)
   3548      1.1     skrll     {
   3549      1.1     skrll       /* Fill in the first three entries in the global offset table.  */
   3550  1.1.1.8  christos       if (htab->elf.hgot->root.u.def.section->size > 0)
   3551      1.1     skrll 	{
   3552      1.1     skrll 	  bfd_put_64 (output_bfd,
   3553      1.1     skrll 		      (sdyn == NULL ? (bfd_vma) 0
   3554      1.1     skrll 		       : sdyn->output_section->vma + sdyn->output_offset),
   3555  1.1.1.8  christos 		      htab->elf.hgot->root.u.def.section->contents);
   3556      1.1     skrll 	  /* One entry for shared object struct ptr.  */
   3557  1.1.1.8  christos 	  bfd_put_64 (output_bfd, (bfd_vma) 0,
   3558  1.1.1.8  christos 		      htab->elf.hgot->root.u.def.section->contents + 8);
   3559      1.1     skrll 	  /* One entry for _dl_runtime_resolve.  */
   3560  1.1.1.8  christos 	  bfd_put_64 (output_bfd, (bfd_vma) 0,
   3561  1.1.1.8  christos 		      htab->elf.hgot->root.u.def.section->contents + 16);
   3562      1.1     skrll 	}
   3563  1.1.1.9  christos       if (htab->elf.sgot != NULL && htab->elf.sgot->size > 0)
   3564  1.1.1.9  christos 	elf_section_data (htab->elf.sgot->output_section)
   3565  1.1.1.9  christos 	  ->this_hdr.sh_entsize = 8;
   3566      1.1     skrll     }
   3567  1.1.1.3  christos 
   3568  1.1.1.3  christos   /* Finish dynamic symbol for local IFUNC symbols.  */
   3569  1.1.1.4  christos   for (ibfd = info->input_bfds; ibfd != NULL; ibfd = ibfd->link.next)
   3570  1.1.1.3  christos     {
   3571  1.1.1.3  christos       struct plt_entry *local_plt;
   3572  1.1.1.3  christos       Elf_Internal_Sym *isym;
   3573  1.1.1.3  christos       Elf_Internal_Shdr *symtab_hdr;
   3574  1.1.1.3  christos 
   3575  1.1.1.3  christos       symtab_hdr = &elf_symtab_hdr (ibfd);
   3576  1.1.1.3  christos 
   3577  1.1.1.6  christos       if (!is_s390_elf (ibfd))
   3578  1.1.1.6  christos 	continue;
   3579  1.1.1.6  christos 
   3580  1.1.1.3  christos       local_plt = elf_s390_local_plt (ibfd);
   3581  1.1.1.3  christos       if (local_plt != NULL)
   3582  1.1.1.3  christos 	for (i = 0; i < symtab_hdr->sh_info; i++)
   3583  1.1.1.3  christos 	  {
   3584  1.1.1.3  christos 	    if (local_plt[i].plt.offset != (bfd_vma) -1)
   3585  1.1.1.3  christos 	      {
   3586  1.1.1.3  christos 		asection *sec = local_plt[i].sec;
   3587  1.1.1.9  christos 		isym = bfd_sym_from_r_symndx (&htab->elf.sym_cache, ibfd, i);
   3588  1.1.1.3  christos 		if (isym == NULL)
   3589  1.1.1.9  christos 		  return false;
   3590  1.1.1.3  christos 
   3591  1.1.1.3  christos 		if (ELF_ST_TYPE (isym->st_info) == STT_GNU_IFUNC)
   3592  1.1.1.3  christos 		  elf_s390_finish_ifunc_symbol (output_bfd, info, NULL, htab,
   3593  1.1.1.3  christos 						local_plt[i].plt.offset,
   3594  1.1.1.3  christos 						isym->st_value
   3595  1.1.1.3  christos 						+ sec->output_section->vma
   3596  1.1.1.3  christos 						+ sec->output_offset);
   3597  1.1.1.3  christos 
   3598  1.1.1.3  christos 	      }
   3599  1.1.1.3  christos 	  }
   3600  1.1.1.3  christos     }
   3601  1.1.1.3  christos 
   3602  1.1.1.9  christos   return true;
   3603      1.1     skrll }
   3604  1.1.1.6  christos 
   3605  1.1.1.6  christos /* Support for core dump NOTE sections.  */
   3607  1.1.1.9  christos 
   3608  1.1.1.6  christos static bool
   3609  1.1.1.6  christos elf_s390_grok_prstatus (bfd *abfd, Elf_Internal_Note *note)
   3610  1.1.1.6  christos {
   3611  1.1.1.6  christos   int offset;
   3612  1.1.1.6  christos   size_t size;
   3613  1.1.1.6  christos 
   3614  1.1.1.6  christos   switch (note->descsz)
   3615  1.1.1.6  christos     {
   3616  1.1.1.9  christos     default:
   3617  1.1.1.6  christos       return false;
   3618  1.1.1.6  christos 
   3619  1.1.1.6  christos     case 336:			/* sizeof(struct elf_prstatus) on s390x */
   3620  1.1.1.6  christos       /* pr_cursig */
   3621  1.1.1.6  christos       elf_tdata (abfd)->core->signal = bfd_get_16 (abfd, note->descdata + 12);
   3622  1.1.1.6  christos 
   3623  1.1.1.6  christos       /* pr_pid */
   3624  1.1.1.6  christos       elf_tdata (abfd)->core->lwpid = bfd_get_32 (abfd, note->descdata + 32);
   3625  1.1.1.6  christos 
   3626  1.1.1.6  christos       /* pr_reg */
   3627  1.1.1.6  christos       offset = 112;
   3628  1.1.1.6  christos       size = 216;
   3629  1.1.1.6  christos       break;
   3630  1.1.1.6  christos     }
   3631  1.1.1.6  christos 
   3632  1.1.1.6  christos   /* Make a ".reg/999" section.  */
   3633  1.1.1.6  christos   return _bfd_elfcore_make_pseudosection (abfd, ".reg",
   3634  1.1.1.6  christos 					  size, note->descpos + offset);
   3635  1.1.1.6  christos }
   3636  1.1.1.9  christos 
   3637  1.1.1.6  christos static bool
   3638  1.1.1.6  christos elf_s390_grok_psinfo (bfd *abfd, Elf_Internal_Note *note)
   3639  1.1.1.6  christos {
   3640  1.1.1.6  christos   switch (note->descsz)
   3641  1.1.1.6  christos     {
   3642  1.1.1.9  christos     default:
   3643  1.1.1.6  christos       return false;
   3644  1.1.1.6  christos 
   3645  1.1.1.6  christos     case 136:			/* sizeof(struct elf_prpsinfo) on s390x */
   3646  1.1.1.6  christos       elf_tdata (abfd)->core->pid
   3647  1.1.1.6  christos 	= bfd_get_32 (abfd, note->descdata + 24);
   3648  1.1.1.6  christos       elf_tdata (abfd)->core->program
   3649  1.1.1.6  christos 	= _bfd_elfcore_strndup (abfd, note->descdata + 40, 16);
   3650  1.1.1.6  christos       elf_tdata (abfd)->core->command
   3651  1.1.1.6  christos 	= _bfd_elfcore_strndup (abfd, note->descdata + 56, 80);
   3652  1.1.1.6  christos     }
   3653  1.1.1.6  christos 
   3654  1.1.1.6  christos   /* Note that for some reason, a spurious space is tacked
   3655  1.1.1.6  christos      onto the end of the args in some (at least one anyway)
   3656  1.1.1.6  christos      implementations, so strip it off if it exists.  */
   3657  1.1.1.6  christos 
   3658  1.1.1.6  christos   {
   3659  1.1.1.6  christos     char *command = elf_tdata (abfd)->core->command;
   3660  1.1.1.6  christos     int n = strlen (command);
   3661  1.1.1.6  christos 
   3662  1.1.1.6  christos     if (0 < n && command[n - 1] == ' ')
   3663  1.1.1.6  christos       command[n - 1] = '\0';
   3664  1.1.1.6  christos   }
   3665  1.1.1.9  christos 
   3666  1.1.1.6  christos   return true;
   3667  1.1.1.6  christos }
   3668  1.1.1.6  christos 
   3669  1.1.1.6  christos static char *
   3670  1.1.1.6  christos elf_s390_write_core_note (bfd *abfd, char *buf, int *bufsiz,
   3671  1.1.1.6  christos 			  int note_type, ...)
   3672  1.1.1.6  christos {
   3673      1.1     skrll   va_list ap;
   3674  1.1.1.6  christos 
   3675  1.1.1.6  christos   switch (note_type)
   3676  1.1.1.6  christos     {
   3677  1.1.1.6  christos     default:
   3678  1.1.1.6  christos       return NULL;
   3679  1.1.1.6  christos 
   3680  1.1.1.6  christos     case NT_PRPSINFO:
   3681  1.1.1.7  christos       {
   3682  1.1.1.6  christos 	char data[136] ATTRIBUTE_NONSTRING = { 0 };
   3683  1.1.1.6  christos 	const char *fname, *psargs;
   3684  1.1.1.6  christos 
   3685  1.1.1.6  christos 	va_start (ap, note_type);
   3686  1.1.1.6  christos 	fname = va_arg (ap, const char *);
   3687  1.1.1.6  christos 	psargs = va_arg (ap, const char *);
   3688  1.1.1.6  christos 	va_end (ap);
   3689  1.1.1.6  christos 
   3690  1.1.1.8  christos 	strncpy (data + 40, fname, 16);
   3691  1.1.1.7  christos #if GCC_VERSION == 8000 || GCC_VERSION == 8001
   3692  1.1.1.8  christos 	DIAGNOSTIC_PUSH;
   3693  1.1.1.7  christos 	/* GCC 8.0 and 8.1 warn about 80 equals destination size with
   3694  1.1.1.7  christos 	   -Wstringop-truncation:
   3695  1.1.1.7  christos 	   https://gcc.gnu.org/bugzilla/show_bug.cgi?id=85643
   3696  1.1.1.7  christos 	 */
   3697  1.1.1.7  christos 	DIAGNOSTIC_IGNORE_STRINGOP_TRUNCATION;
   3698  1.1.1.6  christos #endif
   3699  1.1.1.8  christos 	strncpy (data + 56, psargs, 80);
   3700  1.1.1.7  christos #if GCC_VERSION == 8000 || GCC_VERSION == 8001
   3701  1.1.1.7  christos 	DIAGNOSTIC_POP;
   3702  1.1.1.6  christos #endif
   3703  1.1.1.6  christos 	return elfcore_write_note (abfd, buf, bufsiz, "CORE", note_type,
   3704  1.1.1.6  christos 				   &data, sizeof (data));
   3705  1.1.1.6  christos       }
   3706  1.1.1.6  christos 
   3707  1.1.1.6  christos     case NT_PRSTATUS:
   3708  1.1.1.6  christos       {
   3709  1.1.1.6  christos 	char data[336] = { 0 };
   3710  1.1.1.6  christos 	long pid;
   3711  1.1.1.6  christos 	int cursig;
   3712  1.1.1.6  christos 	const void *gregs;
   3713  1.1.1.6  christos 
   3714  1.1.1.6  christos 	va_start (ap, note_type);
   3715  1.1.1.6  christos 	pid = va_arg (ap, long);
   3716  1.1.1.6  christos 	cursig = va_arg (ap, int);
   3717  1.1.1.6  christos 	gregs = va_arg (ap, const void *);
   3718  1.1.1.6  christos 	va_end (ap);
   3719  1.1.1.6  christos 
   3720  1.1.1.6  christos 	bfd_put_16 (abfd, cursig, data + 12);
   3721  1.1.1.6  christos 	bfd_put_32 (abfd, pid, data + 32);
   3722  1.1.1.6  christos 	memcpy (data + 112, gregs, 216);
   3723  1.1.1.6  christos 	return elfcore_write_note (abfd, buf, bufsiz, "CORE", note_type,
   3724  1.1.1.6  christos 				   &data, sizeof (data));
   3725  1.1.1.6  christos       }
   3726  1.1.1.6  christos     }
   3727  1.1.1.6  christos   /* NOTREACHED */
   3728  1.1.1.6  christos }
   3729      1.1     skrll 
   3730      1.1     skrll /* Return address for Ith PLT stub in section PLT, for relocation REL
   3732      1.1     skrll    or (bfd_vma) -1 if it should not be included.  */
   3733      1.1     skrll 
   3734      1.1     skrll static bfd_vma
   3735      1.1     skrll elf_s390_plt_sym_val (bfd_vma i, const asection *plt,
   3736      1.1     skrll 		      const arelent *rel ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
   3737      1.1     skrll {
   3738      1.1     skrll   return plt->vma + PLT_FIRST_ENTRY_SIZE + i * PLT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   3739  1.1.1.4  christos }
   3740  1.1.1.4  christos 
   3741  1.1.1.4  christos /* Merge backend specific data from an object file to the output
   3742  1.1.1.9  christos    object file when linking.  */
   3743  1.1.1.6  christos 
   3744  1.1.1.6  christos static bool
   3745  1.1.1.6  christos elf64_s390_merge_private_bfd_data (bfd *ibfd, struct bfd_link_info *info)
   3746  1.1.1.9  christos {
   3747  1.1.1.6  christos   if (!is_s390_elf (ibfd) || !is_s390_elf (info->output_bfd))
   3748  1.1.1.6  christos     return true;
   3749  1.1.1.6  christos 
   3750  1.1.1.6  christos   return elf_s390_merge_obj_attributes (ibfd, info);
   3751  1.1.1.6  christos }
   3752  1.1.1.6  christos 
   3753  1.1.1.6  christos /* We may add a PT_S390_PGSTE program header.  */
   3754  1.1.1.6  christos 
   3755  1.1.1.6  christos static int
   3756  1.1.1.6  christos elf_s390_additional_program_headers (bfd *abfd ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
   3757  1.1.1.6  christos 				     struct bfd_link_info *info)
   3758  1.1.1.6  christos {
   3759  1.1.1.6  christos   struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *htab;
   3760  1.1.1.6  christos 
   3761  1.1.1.6  christos   if (info)
   3762  1.1.1.6  christos     {
   3763  1.1.1.6  christos       htab = elf_s390_hash_table (info);
   3764  1.1.1.6  christos       if (htab)
   3765  1.1.1.6  christos 	return htab->params->pgste;
   3766  1.1.1.6  christos     }
   3767  1.1.1.6  christos   return 0;
   3768  1.1.1.6  christos }
   3769  1.1.1.6  christos 
   3770  1.1.1.6  christos 
   3771  1.1.1.9  christos /* Add the PT_S390_PGSTE program header.  */
   3772  1.1.1.6  christos 
   3773  1.1.1.4  christos static bool
   3774  1.1.1.6  christos elf_s390_modify_segment_map (bfd *abfd, struct bfd_link_info *info)
   3775  1.1.1.6  christos {
   3776  1.1.1.6  christos   struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *htab;
   3777  1.1.1.6  christos   struct elf_segment_map *m, *pm = NULL;
   3778  1.1.1.9  christos 
   3779  1.1.1.6  christos   if (!abfd || !info)
   3780  1.1.1.6  christos     return true;
   3781  1.1.1.6  christos 
   3782  1.1.1.9  christos   htab = elf_s390_hash_table (info);
   3783  1.1.1.6  christos   if (!htab || !htab->params->pgste)
   3784  1.1.1.6  christos     return true;
   3785  1.1.1.6  christos 
   3786  1.1.1.6  christos   /* If there is already a PT_S390_PGSTE header, avoid adding
   3787  1.1.1.6  christos      another.  */
   3788  1.1.1.6  christos   m = elf_seg_map (abfd);
   3789  1.1.1.6  christos   while (m && m->p_type != PT_S390_PGSTE)
   3790  1.1.1.6  christos     {
   3791  1.1.1.6  christos       pm = m;
   3792  1.1.1.6  christos       m = m->next;
   3793  1.1.1.6  christos     }
   3794  1.1.1.9  christos 
   3795  1.1.1.4  christos   if (m)
   3796  1.1.1.6  christos     return true;
   3797  1.1.1.6  christos 
   3798  1.1.1.6  christos   m = (struct elf_segment_map *)
   3799  1.1.1.9  christos     bfd_zalloc (abfd, sizeof (struct elf_segment_map));
   3800  1.1.1.6  christos   if (m == NULL)
   3801  1.1.1.6  christos     return false;
   3802  1.1.1.6  christos   m->p_type = PT_S390_PGSTE;
   3803  1.1.1.6  christos   m->count = 0;
   3804  1.1.1.6  christos   m->next = NULL;
   3805  1.1.1.4  christos   if (pm)
   3806  1.1.1.9  christos     pm->next = m;
   3807  1.1.1.4  christos 
   3808  1.1.1.4  christos   return true;
   3809  1.1.1.9  christos }
   3810  1.1.1.6  christos 
   3811  1.1.1.6  christos bool
   3812  1.1.1.6  christos bfd_elf_s390_set_options (struct bfd_link_info *info,
   3813  1.1.1.6  christos 			  struct s390_elf_params *params)
   3814  1.1.1.6  christos {
   3815  1.1.1.6  christos   struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *htab;
   3816  1.1.1.6  christos 
   3817  1.1.1.6  christos   if (info)
   3818  1.1.1.6  christos     {
   3819  1.1.1.6  christos       htab = elf_s390_hash_table (info);
   3820  1.1.1.6  christos       if (htab)
   3821  1.1.1.6  christos 	htab->params = params;
   3822  1.1.1.9  christos     }
   3823  1.1.1.6  christos 
   3824  1.1.1.6  christos   return true;
   3825  1.1.1.6  christos }
   3826      1.1     skrll 
   3827      1.1     skrll 
   3828      1.1     skrll /* Why was the hash table entry size definition changed from
   3829      1.1     skrll    ARCH_SIZE/8 to 4? This breaks the 64 bit dynamic linker and
   3830      1.1     skrll    this is the only reason for the s390_elf64_size_info structure.  */
   3831      1.1     skrll 
   3832      1.1     skrll const struct elf_size_info s390_elf64_size_info =
   3833      1.1     skrll {
   3834      1.1     skrll   sizeof (Elf64_External_Ehdr),
   3835      1.1     skrll   sizeof (Elf64_External_Phdr),
   3836      1.1     skrll   sizeof (Elf64_External_Shdr),
   3837      1.1     skrll   sizeof (Elf64_External_Rel),
   3838      1.1     skrll   sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela),
   3839      1.1     skrll   sizeof (Elf64_External_Sym),
   3840      1.1     skrll   sizeof (Elf64_External_Dyn),
   3841      1.1     skrll   sizeof (Elf_External_Note),
   3842      1.1     skrll   8,		/* hash-table entry size.  */
   3843      1.1     skrll   1,		/* internal relocations per external relocations.  */
   3844      1.1     skrll   64,		/* arch_size.  */
   3845      1.1     skrll   3,		/* log_file_align.  */
   3846      1.1     skrll   ELFCLASS64, EV_CURRENT,
   3847      1.1     skrll   bfd_elf64_write_out_phdrs,
   3848      1.1     skrll   bfd_elf64_write_shdrs_and_ehdr,
   3849      1.1     skrll   bfd_elf64_checksum_contents,
   3850      1.1     skrll   bfd_elf64_write_relocs,
   3851      1.1     skrll   bfd_elf64_swap_symbol_in,
   3852      1.1     skrll   bfd_elf64_swap_symbol_out,
   3853      1.1     skrll   bfd_elf64_slurp_reloc_table,
   3854      1.1     skrll   bfd_elf64_slurp_symbol_table,
   3855      1.1     skrll   bfd_elf64_swap_dyn_in,
   3856      1.1     skrll   bfd_elf64_swap_dyn_out,
   3857      1.1     skrll   bfd_elf64_swap_reloc_in,
   3858      1.1     skrll   bfd_elf64_swap_reloc_out,
   3859      1.1     skrll   bfd_elf64_swap_reloca_in,
   3860      1.1     skrll   bfd_elf64_swap_reloca_out
   3861  1.1.1.4  christos };
   3862      1.1     skrll 
   3863      1.1     skrll #define TARGET_BIG_SYM	s390_elf64_vec
   3864  1.1.1.2  christos #define TARGET_BIG_NAME	"elf64-s390"
   3865      1.1     skrll #define ELF_ARCH	bfd_arch_s390
   3866      1.1     skrll #define ELF_TARGET_ID	S390_ELF_DATA
   3867      1.1     skrll #define ELF_MACHINE_CODE EM_S390
   3868      1.1     skrll #define ELF_MACHINE_ALT1 EM_S390_OLD
   3869      1.1     skrll #define ELF_MAXPAGESIZE 0x1000
   3870      1.1     skrll 
   3871      1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_size_info		s390_elf64_size_info
   3872      1.1     skrll 
   3873      1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_can_gc_sections	1
   3874      1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_can_refcount	1
   3875      1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_want_got_plt	1
   3876      1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_plt_readonly	1
   3877  1.1.1.6  christos #define elf_backend_want_plt_sym	0
   3878      1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_got_header_size	24
   3879      1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_want_dynrelro	1
   3880      1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_rela_normal		1
   3881      1.1     skrll 
   3882      1.1     skrll #define elf_info_to_howto		elf_s390_info_to_howto
   3883      1.1     skrll 
   3884      1.1     skrll #define bfd_elf64_bfd_is_local_label_name     elf_s390_is_local_label_name
   3885  1.1.1.6  christos #define bfd_elf64_bfd_link_hash_table_create  elf_s390_link_hash_table_create
   3886  1.1.1.4  christos #define bfd_elf64_bfd_reloc_type_lookup	      elf_s390_reloc_type_lookup
   3887      1.1     skrll #define bfd_elf64_bfd_reloc_name_lookup	      elf_s390_reloc_name_lookup
   3888      1.1     skrll #define bfd_elf64_bfd_merge_private_bfd_data  elf64_s390_merge_private_bfd_data
   3889      1.1     skrll 
   3890      1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_adjust_dynamic_symbol     elf_s390_adjust_dynamic_symbol
   3891  1.1.1.6  christos #define elf_backend_check_relocs	      elf_s390_check_relocs
   3892      1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_copy_indirect_symbol      elf_s390_copy_indirect_symbol
   3893      1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_create_dynamic_sections   _bfd_elf_create_dynamic_sections
   3894      1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_finish_dynamic_sections   elf_s390_finish_dynamic_sections
   3895      1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_finish_dynamic_symbol     elf_s390_finish_dynamic_symbol
   3896      1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_gc_mark_hook	      elf_s390_gc_mark_hook
   3897      1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_reloc_type_class	      elf_s390_reloc_type_class
   3898      1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_relocate_section	      elf_s390_relocate_section
   3899  1.1.1.6  christos #define elf_backend_size_dynamic_sections     elf_s390_size_dynamic_sections
   3900  1.1.1.6  christos #define elf_backend_init_index_section	      _bfd_elf_init_1_index_section
   3901  1.1.1.6  christos #define elf_backend_grok_prstatus	      elf_s390_grok_prstatus
   3902      1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_grok_psinfo		      elf_s390_grok_psinfo
   3903  1.1.1.6  christos #define elf_backend_write_core_note	      elf_s390_write_core_note
   3904  1.1.1.6  christos #define elf_backend_plt_sym_val		      elf_s390_plt_sym_val
   3905  1.1.1.6  christos #define elf_backend_sort_relocs_p	      elf_s390_elf_sort_relocs_p
   3906      1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_additional_program_headers elf_s390_additional_program_headers
   3907      1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_modify_segment_map	      elf_s390_modify_segment_map
   3908      1.1     skrll 
   3909      1.1     skrll #define bfd_elf64_mkobject		elf_s390_mkobject
   3910      1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_object_p		elf_s390_object_p
   3911                    
   3912                    #include "elf64-target.h"
   3913